WO2023027092A1 - Laminate - Google Patents

Laminate Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023027092A1
WO2023027092A1 PCT/JP2022/031804 JP2022031804W WO2023027092A1 WO 2023027092 A1 WO2023027092 A1 WO 2023027092A1 JP 2022031804 W JP2022031804 W JP 2022031804W WO 2023027092 A1 WO2023027092 A1 WO 2023027092A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
sensitive adhesive
pressure
less
weight
adhesive sheet
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2022/031804
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
一樹 箕浦
直宏 加藤
康 武蔵島
Original Assignee
日東電工株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 日東電工株式会社 filed Critical 日東電工株式会社
Priority to KR1020247009966A priority Critical patent/KR20240055780A/en
Priority to CN202280056859.7A priority patent/CN117836386A/en
Publication of WO2023027092A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023027092A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/10Adhesives in the form of films or foils without carriers
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B27/00Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J133/00Adhesives based on homopolymers or copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and at least one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical, or of salts, anhydrides, esters, amides, imides, or nitriles thereof; Adhesives based on derivatives of such polymers
    • C09J133/04Homopolymers or copolymers of esters
    • C09J133/14Homopolymers or copolymers of esters of esters containing halogen, nitrogen, sulfur or oxygen atoms in addition to the carboxy oxygen
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J175/00Adhesives based on polyureas or polyurethanes; Adhesives based on derivatives of such polymers
    • C09J175/04Polyurethanes
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/20Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by their carriers
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/20Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by their carriers
    • C09J7/29Laminated material
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/30Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by the adhesive composition
    • C09J7/38Pressure-sensitive adhesives [PSA]
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/30Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by the adhesive composition
    • C09J7/38Pressure-sensitive adhesives [PSA]
    • C09J7/381Pressure-sensitive adhesives [PSA] based on macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions involving only carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds
    • C09J7/385Acrylic polymers
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J2301/00Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J2301/10Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils characterized by the structural features of the adhesive tape or sheet
    • C09J2301/12Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils characterized by the structural features of the adhesive tape or sheet by the arrangement of layers
    • C09J2301/124Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils characterized by the structural features of the adhesive tape or sheet by the arrangement of layers the adhesive layer being present on both sides of the carrier, e.g. double-sided adhesive tape

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a laminate including a core and adhesive sheets arranged on each surface of the core.
  • pressure-sensitive adhesives also called pressure-sensitive adhesives; the same shall apply hereinafter
  • pressure-sensitive adhesives are widely used in various industrial fields such as home electric appliances, automobiles, and OA equipment as bonding means with good workability and high adhesion reliability.
  • pressure-sensitive adhesives are widely used for purposes such as joining, fixing, and protecting members in smartphones and other mobile electronic devices.
  • Patent Documents 1 and 2 are cited as technical documents relating to adhesive tapes used for fixing members of portable electronic devices.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive that is applied to the above-mentioned complicated shape is required to have the ability to follow the shape well and adhere to it.
  • the adhesive for fixing a member having a complicated surface shape (which may be a curved surface shape) exhibits a good fixing function while maintaining a state in which the complicated shape is followed without gaps. There is a need to. If the adhesive does not adhere to the curved surface of the adherend and a gap is formed between the adherend and the adherend, water may enter through the gap and water resistance may be impaired.
  • the adhesive is required to have the ability to protect the adherend.
  • mobile electronic devices tend to be easily subjected to impacts and loads from the outside due to their portability.
  • the performance of suppressing deformation (distortion) of a member, etc., placed on the back side of the body is required.
  • the adherend is a flexible printed wiring board to which an electronic component is fixed, the electronic component may be deformed and damaged by an external impact or the like, if the adhesive is poor in protecting the adherend. malfunction may occur. Therefore, the pressure-sensitive adhesive is required to have the performance of suppressing deformation (distortion) of other members due to impact or the like (such performance is hereinafter referred to as "distortion resistance").
  • the present invention has been created in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a structure (laminated body) capable of achieving both conformability to a complicated shape and resistance to distortion.
  • the inventors adopted a laminate composed of two or more constituent elements laminated at least including an adhesive layer, thereby improving both the followability to a complicated shape and the above-mentioned strain resistance. found to get.
  • a laminate comprising a core, a first adhesive sheet arranged on one surface of the core, and a second adhesive sheet arranged on the other surface of the core.
  • the first adhesive sheet and the second adhesive sheet each include an adhesive layer.
  • the product (E A ⁇ T A ) of Young's modulus E A [MPa] and thickness T A [ ⁇ m] of the core is 500,000 or more.
  • one or both of the first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet have a storage elastic modulus G' at 25°C (85°C) of less than 0.05 MPa.
  • one or both of the first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet have a storage elastic modulus G' at 120°C (120°C) of less than 0.03 MPa.
  • the thickness TA of the core is 10 ⁇ m or more and 300 ⁇ m or less. According to such a configuration, it becomes easier to achieve thinning of the laminate and excellent strain resistance.
  • the Young's modulus EA of the core is 3000 MPa or higher. According to such a configuration, it becomes easier to achieve thinning of the laminate and excellent strain resistance.
  • the laminate has a light transmittance C total of 10% or less.
  • a laminate is used in products including a light source such as a backlight module, and tends to be excellent in suppressing light leakage from the light source (light shielding property) and imparting design properties.
  • the laminate has a total thickness T total of 50 ⁇ m or more and 400 ⁇ m or less. Such laminates tend to have excellent conformability to complex shapes.
  • the laminate disclosed here can be preferably used for electronic equipment.
  • the laminate disclosed herein utilizes the features of being excellent in conformability to complex shapes and in distortion resistance, and includes members having complex shapes, and is subject to impact and load from the outside. It is preferably used for portable electronic devices that are easy to wear. Since the laminate disclosed herein has a limited thickness, from this point of view as well, it is preferably used in portable electronic devices that are becoming thinner and lighter.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing the configuration of a laminate according to one embodiment
  • FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing the configuration of a laminate according to another embodiment
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing the configuration of a laminate according to another embodiment
  • It is a schematic diagram explaining the method of a strain resistance test.
  • the term “adhesive” refers to a material that exhibits a soft solid (viscoelastic) state in a temperature range around room temperature and has the property of easily adhering to an adherend under pressure, as described above. .
  • the adhesive as used herein generally has a complex tensile modulus E * (1 Hz), as defined in "C. A. Dahlquist, “Adhesion: Fundamentals and Practice", McLaren & Sons, (1966) P. 143". It may be a material having properties satisfying ⁇ 10 7 dyne/cm 2 (typically, a material having the above properties at 25°C).
  • the laminate disclosed herein includes a non-releasable core, a first adhesive sheet disposed on one surface of the core, and a second adhesive sheet disposed on the other surface of the core.
  • Including sheet the first adhesive sheet is an adhesive sheet containing an adhesive layer
  • the second adhesive sheet is also an adhesive sheet containing an adhesive layer.
  • the first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet may be a pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate in the form of having pressure-sensitive adhesive layers on both sides of a non-releasable substrate (supporting substrate). It may be a material-less pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet.
  • the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet may be a pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate having a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on both sides of a non-releasable substrate (supporting substrate), and has a non-releasable substrate. It may be a substrate-less pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet.
  • the concept of laminate here can include what is called a pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate. Further, the concept of the laminate as used herein may include what is called an adhesive sheet, adhesive tape, adhesive label, adhesive film, and the like.
  • the laminate disclosed herein is typically in the form of a sheet, may be in the form of a roll, or may be in the form of a sheet. Alternatively, it may be a laminated body processed into various shapes.
  • FIG. 1 shows a configuration example of a laminate in which both the first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet are double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets without a base material (double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet without a base material).
  • a laminate 1 shown in FIG. are provided respectively.
  • the first adhesive sheet 11 is composed of an adhesive layer.
  • the second adhesive sheet 12 is also composed of an adhesive layer.
  • the laminate 1 before use (before being attached to an adherend) is spirally wound with the front surface 21A and the back surface 21B superimposed on the release liner 21, which is a release surface.
  • the adhesive surface 12A of the second adhesive sheet 12 is protected by the front surface 21A of the release liner 21, and the adhesive surface 11A of the first adhesive sheet 11 is protected by the back surface 21B of the release liner 21.
  • the adhesive surface 11A and the adhesive surface 12A may be protected by two separate release liners.
  • the first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is a double-sided adhesive type substrate-less pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet (base-less double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet), and the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is a double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive type pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate (double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with substrate).
  • FIG. 2 shows a configuration example of the laminate in the case of .
  • the laminate 1 shown in FIG. 2 includes a core 15, and a first adhesive sheet 11 and a second adhesive sheet 12 are attached to the first surface 15A and the second surface 15B (both of which are non-releasable) of the core 15. are provided respectively.
  • the first adhesive sheet 11 is composed of an adhesive layer.
  • the second adhesive sheet 12 includes a substrate 35, and adhesive layers 32 and 34 are provided on the first surface and the second surface (both of which are non-releasable) of the substrate 35, respectively.
  • the laminate 1 before use (before being attached to an adherend) is spirally wound with the front surface 21A and the back surface 21B superimposed on the release liner 21, which is a release surface.
  • the release liner 21 which is a release surface.
  • the surface (adhesive surface 34A) of the adhesive layer 34 is protected by the front surface 21A of the release liner 21, and the adhesive surface 11A of the first adhesive sheet 11 is protected by the back surface 21B of the release liner 21.
  • the adhesive surface 11A and the adhesive surface 34A may be protected by two separate release liners.
  • FIG. 3 shows a configuration example of a laminate in which both the first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet are double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets with a substrate (double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate).
  • a laminate 1 shown in FIG. are provided respectively.
  • the first adhesive sheet 11 includes a substrate 25, and adhesive layers 36 and 38 are provided on the first surface and the second surface (both of which are non-releasable) of the substrate 25, respectively.
  • the second adhesive sheet 12 includes a substrate 35, and adhesive layers 32 and 34 are provided on the first surface and the second surface (both of which are non-releasable) of the substrate 35, respectively.
  • FIG. 1 shows a configuration example of a laminate in which both the first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet are double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets with a substrate (double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate).
  • a laminate 1 shown in FIG. are provided respectively.
  • the first adhesive sheet 11 includes a substrate 25, and adhesive layers 36
  • the laminate 1 before use (before being attached to an adherend) is spirally wound with the front surface 21A and the back surface 21B superimposed on the release liner 21, which is a release surface.
  • the release liner 21 which is a release surface.
  • the surface of the adhesive layer 34 (adhesive surface 34A) is protected by the front surface 21A of the release liner 21, and the surface of the adhesive layer 36 (adhesive surface 36A) is protected by the back surface 21B of the release liner 21.
  • the adhesive surface 34A and the adhesive surface 36A may be protected by two separate release liners.
  • the core disclosed here is a support member that supports the first adhesive sheet and the second adhesive sheet.
  • the core body is characterized in that the product of Young's modulus and thickness is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. Specifically, the value EA calculated by multiplying the Young's modulus value EA of the core when the unit is MPa and the thickness value TA of the core when the unit is ⁇ m. xTA is 500,000 or more. The use of such a core tends to improve the strain resistance of the laminate.
  • E A ⁇ T A is 70 ⁇ 10 4 or more, more preferably 90 ⁇ 10 4 or more (eg 100 ⁇ 10 4 or more, 110 ⁇ 10 4 or more or 120 ⁇ 10 4 or more) and more preferably 130 ⁇ 10 4 or more.
  • the upper limit of E A ⁇ TA is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of thinning and weight reduction of the laminate, it is preferably 1500 ⁇ 10 4 or less, more preferably 1000 ⁇ 10 4 or less (for example, 800 ⁇ 10 4 or more, 600 ⁇ 10 4 or more, or 500 ⁇ 10 4 or less), more preferably 400 ⁇ 10 4 or less.
  • the Young's modulus EA of the core is not particularly limited as long as the product of it and the thickness TA of the core is equal to or greater than a predetermined value.
  • the Young's modulus EA of the core is preferably 3000 MPa or more, more preferably 5000 MPa or more (for example, 7000 MPa or more, 8000 MPa or more, or 9000 MPa or more). It is preferably 10000 MPa or more.
  • the Young's modulus EA of the core is preferably 60,000 MPa or more, more preferably 70,000 MPa or more (for example, 90,000 MPa or more, 100,000 MPa or more, or 130,000 MPa or more), More preferably, it is 150000 MPa or more.
  • the upper limit of the Young's modulus EA of the core is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of workability and handleability, the Young's modulus EA of the core is preferably 650000 MPa or less, more preferably 400000 MPa or less (for example, it may be 300000 MPa or less, may be 280000 MPa or less, and may be 250000 MPa or less. may be
  • the thickness TA of the core is not particularly limited as long as the product of the thickness TA of the core and the Young's modulus EA of the core is equal to or greater than a predetermined value.
  • the thickness TA of the core is preferably 10 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 12 ⁇ m or more (for example, 15 ⁇ m or more), and still more preferably 20 ⁇ m or more.
  • the upper limit of the thickness TA of the core is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of thinning and weight reduction of the laminate, the thickness TA of the core is preferably 500 ⁇ m or less (for example, 300 ⁇ m or less), more preferably 270 ⁇ m or less, or 250 ⁇ m or less. 150 ⁇ m or less.
  • the material of the core included in the laminate disclosed here is not particularly limited.
  • the core metal foil, resin film, foam film, paper, cloth, composites thereof, and the like can be used.
  • a metal foil can be preferably used as the core.
  • Common metal foils such as stainless steel foil, aluminum foil, copper foil, titanium foil, and zinc foil can be used as the metal foil.
  • stainless steel foil, aluminum foil, and copper foil can be preferably used from the viewpoint of cost and workability.
  • the metal foil may have the form of a single layer, or may have a multi-layered structure of two, three or more layers.
  • it may be a plated foil in which different kinds of metals are plated on the surface of a metal foil.
  • it may have a multi-layer structure including a metal layer and a layer made of another material (eg, paper).
  • a core containing a resin film as a base film can be preferably used.
  • the base film is typically an independently shape-maintainable (independent) member.
  • the core in the technique disclosed here can be substantially composed of such a base film.
  • the core may contain an auxiliary layer in addition to the base film. Examples of the auxiliary layer include an undercoat layer, an antistatic layer, a colored layer, etc. provided on the surface of the base film.
  • a core having a colored layer disposed on the surface of the base polymer can be preferably used.
  • the colorant contained in the colored layer the same colorant as used in the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet described later can be preferably employed.
  • the above resin film is a film containing a resin material as a main component (a component contained in the resin film in excess of 50% by weight).
  • resin films include polyolefin resin films such as polyethylene (PE), polypropylene (PP), and ethylene/propylene copolymer; polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polybutylene terephthalate (PBT), polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), and the like.
  • the resin film may be a rubber-based film such as a natural rubber film or a butyl rubber film. Among them, from the viewpoint of handleability and workability, a polyester film is preferred, and a PET film is particularly preferred.
  • the resin film may have a single-layer structure, or may have a multi-layer structure of two layers, three layers or more. From the viewpoint of shape stability, the resin film preferably has a single-layer structure. In the case of a multilayer structure, at least one layer (preferably all layers) is preferably a layer having a continuous structure of the resin (for example, polyester resin).
  • the method for producing the resin film is not particularly limited, and a conventionally known method may be appropriately adopted. For example, conventionally known general film forming methods such as extrusion molding, inflation molding, T-die casting, and calender roll molding can be employed as appropriate.
  • the core including the resin film may contain fillers (inorganic fillers, organic fillers, etc.), colorants, dispersants (surfactants, etc.), anti-aging agents, antioxidants, etc.
  • Various additives such as agents, ultraviolet absorbers, antistatic agents, lubricants and plasticizers may be blended.
  • the blending ratio of various additives is usually less than about 30% by weight (for example, less than about 20% by weight, preferably less than about 10% by weight).
  • a foam film can be used as the core material.
  • the foam film used for the core is a film having a portion with cells (cell structure), typically a film containing at least one stratified foam (foam layer).
  • foam layer typically a film containing at least one stratified foam (foam layer).
  • a preferred example of the foam film in the technology disclosed herein is a foam film composed of a single (one) foam layer.
  • paper or cloth is used as the core material.
  • paper that can be used for the core include Japanese paper, kraft paper, glassine paper, woodfree paper, synthetic paper, top coat paper, and the like.
  • fabrics include woven fabrics and non-woven fabrics obtained by spinning various fibrous materials alone or by blending them.
  • the fibrous substance include cotton, staple fiber, manila hemp, pulp, rayon, acetate fiber, polyester fiber, polyvinyl alcohol fiber, polyamide fiber, and polyolefin fiber.
  • the nonwoven fabric referred to here is a concept that refers to a nonwoven fabric for adhesive sheets that is mainly used in the field of adhesive tapes and other adhesive sheets, and is typically a nonwoven fabric that is produced using a general paper machine. (sometimes referred to as so-called "paper").
  • the term "resin film” as used herein is typically a non-porous resin sheet, which is distinguished from, for example, non-woven fabrics (that is, does not include non-woven fabrics).
  • the resin film may be a non-stretched film, a uniaxially stretched film, or a biaxially stretched film.
  • the surface of the substrate on which the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is to be provided may be subjected to surface treatment such as application of an undercoat, corona discharge treatment, plasma treatment, or the like.
  • the surface of the core may be subjected to conventionally known surface treatments such as corona discharge treatment, plasma treatment, ultraviolet irradiation treatment, acid treatment, alkali treatment, application of a primer, and the like.
  • a surface treatment can be a treatment for improving the adhesion between the core and the adhesive sheet (adhesive layer), in other words, the anchoring property of the adhesive sheet (adhesive layer) to the core.
  • ⁇ Adhesive sheet> (25°C storage modulus)
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet (one or both of the first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet; the same shall apply hereinafter) contained in the laminate disclosed herein has a storage elastic modulus G' at 25°C of the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet (25°C) is characterized by being less than 0.20 MPa.
  • G' storage elastic modulus
  • the G' (25°C) is preferably less than 0.19 MPa, more preferably less than 0.18 MPa, still more preferably less than about 0.17 MPa (e.g., less than 0.15 MPa), particularly preferably less than 0.14 MPa, It may be less than 0.1 MPa.
  • the lower limit of the G' (25 ° C.) is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of adhesion, the G' (25 ° C.) is preferably 0.02 MPa or more, more preferably 0.035 MPa or more. 0.05 MPa or more, 0.1 MPa or more, or 0.12 MPa or more.
  • the PSA sheet may have a storage modulus G'(85°C) at 85°C of less than 0.08 MPa.
  • G' storage modulus
  • the G′ (85° C.) is preferably less than 0.07 MPa, more preferably less than 0.06 MPa, even more preferably less than about 0.05 MPa (for example, less than 0.045 MPa).
  • the lower limit of the G' (85 ° C.) is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of adhesion, the G' (85 ° C.) is usually 0.01 MPa or more, preferably 0.02 MPa or more. Yes, it may be 0.03 MPa or more, or 0.04 MPa or more.
  • the storage modulus G'(120°C) at 120°C of the PSA sheet can be less than 0.04 MPa.
  • the G′ (120° C.) is preferably less than 0.035 MPa, more preferably less than 0.033 MPa, still more preferably less than 0.03 MPa (for example, less than 0.028 MPa).
  • the lower limit of the G' (120 ° C.) is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of adhesion, the G' (120 ° C.) is usually 0.01 MPa or more, preferably 0.015 MPa or more. , more preferably 0.02 MPa or more, and still more preferably 0.023 MPa or more.
  • the viscoelastic properties of the above-mentioned pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet can be obtained by adjusting the monomer composition of the base polymer contained in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer and, if necessary, by appropriately adjusting the type and amount of the tackifying resin based on the contents described in this specification. It can be adjusted by selecting, appropriately setting the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing other components (such as a cross-linking agent) as necessary, polymer polymerization conditions, pressure-sensitive adhesive layer manufacturing conditions, and the like.
  • other components such as a cross-linking agent
  • the 25° C. storage modulus, 85° C. storage modulus and 120° C. storage modulus of the PSA sheet can be determined by dynamic viscoelasticity measurement. Specifically, a test piece having a thickness of about 2 mm is prepared by stacking a plurality of adhesive sheets to be measured. This test piece was punched into a disk shape with a diameter of 7.9 mm. A dynamic viscoelasticity measurement is performed under the conditions to obtain a 25°C storage modulus, an 85°C storage modulus and a 120°C storage modulus.
  • ⁇ Measurement mode Shear mode ⁇ Temperature range: -70°C to 150°C ⁇ Temperature increase rate: 5°C/min ⁇ Measurement frequency: 1Hz It is also measured by the above method in the examples described later.
  • the thickness T B of the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet (not including a release liner) disclosed herein is suitably 3 ⁇ m or more, preferably 5 ⁇ m or more, more preferably over 10 ⁇ m, and still more preferably 15 ⁇ m or more.
  • the thickness T B of the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet can be, for example, 500 ⁇ m or less, preferably 350 ⁇ m or less, and preferably 270 ⁇ m or less (for example, 250 ⁇ m or less) from the viewpoint of thinning.
  • the thickness T B1 of the substrate-less pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is usually appropriately 3 ⁇ m or more, preferably 5 ⁇ m or more, and more preferably 10 ⁇ m or more. , more preferably 15 ⁇ m or more.
  • the thickness T B1 of the substrate-less pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is usually appropriately 200 ⁇ m or less, and from the viewpoint of thinning, it is preferably 100 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 70 ⁇ m or less (e.g., 60 ⁇ m or less), and still more preferably 50 ⁇ m or less. .
  • the thickness T B2 of the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate is preferably more than 10 ⁇ m, more preferably 20 ⁇ m or more, and still more preferably 25 ⁇ m or more, Especially preferably, it is 30 ⁇ m or more.
  • the thickness T B2 of the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate is usually suitably 500 ⁇ m or less, preferably 300 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 270 ⁇ m or less (for example, 260 ⁇ m or less), and 150 ⁇ m or less from the viewpoint of thinning. good too.
  • the light transmittance CB of the adhesive sheet is not particularly limited.
  • the light transmittance CB is 20% or less (preferably 10% or less, more preferably 5% or less, especially (preferably 1.5% or less) may be used.
  • the lower limit of the light transmittance CB is not particularly limited, and may be substantially 0%, that is, the detection limit or less, 1% or more, 5% or more, or 15% or more.
  • the light transmittance C B of the adhesive sheet may be greater than 30%, may be greater than 50%, or may be 70% or more (eg, 75% or more).
  • the light transmittance CB of the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet can be measured by the following method. Also in the examples described later, it is measured by the following method.
  • the light transmittance CB [%] of the adhesive sheet is the light transmittance in the thickness direction of the adhesive sheet peeled off from the release liner (light transmittance at a wavelength of 550 nm). is measured using a transmissometer.
  • a spectrophotometer manufactured by Hitachi apparatus name “U4150 type spectrophotometer” or an equivalent thereof is used.
  • the type of adhesive that constitutes the adhesive layer contained in the adhesive sheet is not particularly limited.
  • the adhesives include acrylic polymers, rubber polymers (natural rubber, synthetic rubber, mixtures thereof, etc.), polyester polymers, urethane polymers, polyether polymers, silicone polymers, which can be used in the field of adhesives. It may contain one or more of various rubber-like polymers such as polyamide-based polymers and fluorine-based polymers as an adhesive polymer (in the sense of a structural polymer that forms an adhesive, hereinafter also referred to as "base polymer").
  • a pressure-sensitive adhesive containing an acrylic polymer or a rubber-based polymer as a base polymer can be preferably employed.
  • a pressure-sensitive adhesive having an acrylic polymer as a base polymer (acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive) is preferable.
  • the technique disclosed here is preferably implemented in a mode using an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive.
  • a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer composed of an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that is, a pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet having an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive layer will be mainly described below. It is not intended to be limited to
  • the “base polymer” of the adhesive refers to the main component of the rubber-like polymer contained in the adhesive, and is not to be construed as being limited to anything other than this.
  • the term “rubber-like polymer” refers to a polymer that exhibits rubber elasticity in a temperature range around room temperature.
  • the term “main component” refers to a component contained in an amount exceeding 50% by weight unless otherwise specified.
  • acrylic polymer refers to a polymer containing monomer units derived from a monomer having at least one (meth)acryloyl group in one molecule as monomer units constituting the polymer.
  • a monomer having at least one (meth)acryloyl group in one molecule is also referred to as "acrylic monomer”.
  • an acrylic polymer in this specification is defined as a polymer containing monomeric units derived from an acrylic monomer.
  • a typical example of an acrylic polymer is an acrylic polymer containing more than 50% by weight of the acrylic monomer in the total monomer components used to synthesize the acrylic polymer.
  • (meth)acryloyl is a generic term for acryloyl and methacryloyl.
  • (meth)acrylate is a generic term for acrylate and methacrylate, and
  • (meth)acrylic is generic for acrylic and methacrylic.
  • the acrylic polymer used as the polymer includes, for example, an alkyl (meth)acrylate as a main monomer, and may further include a sub-monomer copolymerizable with the main monomer. things are preferred.
  • the main monomer refers to a component that accounts for more than 50% by weight of the monomer composition in the monomer raw material.
  • alkyl (meth)acrylate for example, a compound represented by the following formula (1) can be preferably used.
  • CH2 C( R1 ) COOR2 (1)
  • R 1 in the above formula (1) is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • R 2 is a chain alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. Hereinafter, such a carbon atom number range may be expressed as "C 1-20 ".
  • an alkyl (meth)acrylate in which R 2 is a C 1-14 (for example, C 1-10 , typically C 4-8 ) chain alkyl group is used as the main monomer.
  • Alkyl (meth)acrylates in which R 2 is a butyl group or a 2-ethylhexyl group are preferred.
  • an alkyl acrylate in which R 1 is a hydrogen atom and R 2 is a C 4-8 chain alkyl group (hereinafter also simply referred to as C 4-8 alkyl acrylate) is used as the main monomer. preferably.
  • alkyl (meth)acrylates in which R 2 is a C 1-20 chain alkyl group include, but are not limited to, methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, propyl (meth)acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, s-butyl (meth) acrylate, t-butyl (meth) acrylate, pentyl (meth) acrylate, isopentyl (meth) acrylate, hexyl (meth) ) acrylate, heptyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, octyl (meth) acrylate, isooctyl (meth) acrylate, nonyl (meth) acrylate, isononyl (meth) acryl
  • alkyl (meth)acrylates may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • Suitable examples of alkyl (meth)acrylates include n-butyl acrylate (BA) and 2-ethylhexyl acrylate (2EHA).
  • Particularly preferred alkyl (meth)acrylates include n-butyl acrylate (BA) and 2-ethylhexyl acrylate (2EHA).
  • the ratio of the alkyl (meth)acrylate to the monomer components constituting the acrylic polymer is typically more than 50% by weight, and can be, for example, 70% by weight or more, and may be 85% by weight or more, or 90% by weight. % by weight or more.
  • the upper limit of the ratio of alkyl (meth)acrylate is not particularly limited, but it is preferably 99.5% by weight or less (for example, 99% by weight or less), or properties based on submonomers such as carboxy group-containing monomers (for example, aggregation 98% by weight or less (for example, less than 97% by weight) from the viewpoint of preferably exerting force).
  • the acrylic polymer may be obtained by polymerizing substantially only alkyl (meth)acrylate.
  • the proportion of C 4-8 alkyl acrylate in the alkyl (meth)acrylate contained in the monomer component is preferably 70% by weight or more, It is more preferably 90% by weight or more.
  • the monomer component constituting the acrylic polymer contains at least one of BA and 2EHA, and the total amount of BA and 2EHA in the alkyl (meth)acrylate contained in the monomer component is 75 wt. % or more (usually 85 wt% or more, for example 90 wt% or more, further 95 wt% or more).
  • the technology disclosed herein can be practiced, for example, in a mode in which the alkyl (meth)acrylate contained in the monomer component is BA alone, 2EHA alone, BA and 2EHA, and the like.
  • the monomer component constituting the acrylic polymer contains 50% by weight or more of C 1-6 alkyl (meth)acrylate.
  • the polymerization ratio of C 1-6 alkyl (meth)acrylate in the acrylic polymer is preferably 50% by weight or more.
  • the ratio of C 1-6 alkyl (meth)acrylate in the monomer component is preferably 80% by weight or more, more preferably 90% by weight or more, and still more preferably 92% by weight or more ( for example greater than 95% by weight).
  • the upper limit of the ratio of C 1-6 alkyl (meth)acrylate in the monomer component is not particularly limited, and is usually 99% by weight or less, and 98% by weight or less in relation to the proportion of other copolymerizable monomers used. 97% by weight or less is preferable, and it may be less than 95% by weight.
  • the C 1-6 alkyl (meth)acrylates may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • the C 1-6 alkyl (meth)acrylate is preferably a C 1-6 alkyl acrylate, more preferably a C 2-6 alkyl acrylate, and even more preferably a C 4-6 alkyl acrylate.
  • the C 1-6 alkyl (meth)acrylate is preferably a C 1-4 alkyl acrylate, more preferably a C 2-4 alkyl acrylate.
  • Preferred examples of C 1-6 alkyl (meth)acrylates include BA.
  • the monomer component constituting the acrylic polymer contains 50% by weight or more of C 7-10 alkyl (meth)acrylate.
  • the copolymerization ratio of C 7-10 alkyl (meth)acrylate in the acrylic polymer is preferably 50% by weight or more.
  • the ratio of C 7-10 alkyl (meth)acrylate in the monomer component may be greater than 60% by weight, may be greater than 70% by weight, and more preferably greater than 80% by weight. , more preferably 90% by weight or more, particularly preferably 92% by weight or more (for example, 95% by weight or more).
  • the upper limit of the ratio of C 7-10 alkyl (meth)acrylate in the monomer component is not particularly limited, and is usually 99% by weight or less, and the relationship with the ratio of other copolymerizable monomers (eg, acidic group-containing monomers). Therefore, it is suitable that the content is 97% by weight or less, and preferably 96% by weight or less.
  • the C 7-10 alkyl (meth)acrylates can be used singly or in combination of two or more. Suitable examples of C 7-10 alkyl (meth)acrylates include C 7-10 alkyl acrylates such as 2EHA, isooctyl acrylate, isononyl acrylate. Among them, 2EHA is preferable.
  • the acrylic polymer in the technology disclosed here may be copolymerized with a sub-monomer.
  • the content of the functional group-containing monomer in the monomer component is not particularly limited.
  • the content of the functional group-containing monomer in the monomer component can be, for example, 0.1% by weight or more, and should be 0.5% by weight or more. is suitable, and it may be 1% by weight or more.
  • the content of the functional group-containing monomer in the monomer component is appropriately 40% by weight or less, and is 20% by weight or less. is preferable, and it may be 10% by weight or less (for example, 5% by weight or less).
  • an acidic group-containing monomer is used as a monomer copolymerizable with the main monomer alkyl (meth)acrylate.
  • the acidic group-containing monomer can improve cohesiveness based on its polarity and exhibit good bonding strength to polar adherends.
  • a cross-linking agent such as an isocyanate-based or epoxy-based cross-linking agent, the acidic group (typically a carboxyl group) becomes a cross-linking point of the acrylic polymer.
  • a carboxy group-containing monomer is preferably used as the acidic group-containing monomer.
  • carboxy group-containing monomers include ethylenically unsaturated monocarboxylic acids such as acrylic acid (AA), methacrylic acid (MAA), carboxyethyl (meth)acrylate, crotonic acid and isocrotonic acid; maleic acid, itaconic acid and citraconic acid; ethylenically unsaturated dicarboxylic acids such as and anhydrides thereof (maleic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, etc.).
  • the acidic group-containing monomer may also be a monomer having a metal salt (for example, an alkali metal salt) of a carboxy group. Among them, AA and MAA are preferred, and AA is more preferred.
  • the content of an acidic group-containing monomer (typically a carboxy group-containing monomer) in the monomer component is 1.
  • a content of 0% by weight or more is appropriate.
  • the copolymerization ratio of the acidic group-containing monomer in the acrylic polymer is preferably 1.5% by weight or more, more preferably 2.0% by weight or more, still more preferably 2.5% by weight or more, and particularly preferably 3.0% by weight. % or more.
  • the copolymerization ratio of the acidic group-containing monomer in the acrylic polymer is 4.0% by weight or more, may be more than 5.0% by weight, or may be 6.0% by weight or more. , 6.5% by weight or more.
  • the copolymerization ratio of the acidic group-containing monomer in the acrylic polymer is usually 20% by weight or less, and preferably 10% by weight from the viewpoint of improving the adhesion to the adherend and thus the followability. less than, more preferably less than 8.0 wt%, more preferably less than 7.0 wt%, particularly preferably less than 6.0 wt%, even less than 5.0 wt% (e.g. less than 4.0 wt%) good.
  • the acrylic polymer preferably used in the technology disclosed herein can be a copolymer obtained by copolymerizing an alkyl (meth)acrylate as a main monomer and an acidic group-containing monomer as a sub-monomer.
  • the proportion of copolymer components other than the alkyl (meth)acrylate and the acidic group-containing monomer may be less than 10% by weight, less than 3% by weight, or less than 1% by weight.
  • the monomer component constituting the acrylic polymer may be substantially free of functional group-containing monomers other than the above acidic group-containing monomers.
  • An acrylic polymer substantially composed of an alkyl (meth)acrylate and an acidic group-containing monomer can maximize the effects of the alkyl (meth)acrylate and the acidic group-containing monomer.
  • the monomer component forming the acrylic polymer may contain, for example, a hydroxyl group-containing monomer as a functional group-containing monomer other than the above-mentioned acidic group-containing monomer.
  • the proportion of the hydroxyl group-containing monomer in the monomer component may be, for example, about 0.01% by weight or more and less than 1% by weight, may be less than 0.5% by weight, or may be less than 0.1% by weight. .
  • the monomer component that constitutes the acrylic polymer may contain other copolymerization components other than the sub-monomers described above for the purpose of improving the cohesive force.
  • copolymerization components include vinyl ester monomers such as vinyl acetate; aromatic vinyl compounds such as styrene; ) acrylate; aryl (meth)acrylate (e.g. phenyl (meth)acrylate), aryloxyalkyl (meth)acrylate (e.g. phenoxyethyl (meth)acrylate), arylalkyl (meth)acrylate (e.g. benzyl (meth)acrylate), etc.
  • Aromatic ring-containing (meth)acrylates olefinic monomers; chlorine-containing monomers; isocyanate group-containing monomers such as 2-(meth)acryloyloxyethyl isocyanate; alkoxy such as methoxyethyl (meth)acrylate and ethoxyethyl (meth)acrylate group-containing monomers; vinyl ether-based monomers such as methyl vinyl ether and ethyl vinyl ether;
  • the above-mentioned other copolymerization components can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • the amount of such other copolymerization components may be appropriately selected according to the purpose and application and is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of appropriately exhibiting the effects of use, it is suitable to be 0.05% by weight or more. , 0.5% by weight or more.
  • the content of other copolymerization components in the monomer component is suitably 20% by weight or less, and 10% by weight or less (for example, 5% by weight or less). good too.
  • the technology disclosed herein can also be preferably practiced in a mode in which the monomer component does not substantially contain other copolymerization components.
  • the monomer component does not substantially contain other copolymerization components means that other copolymerization components are not used at least intentionally, and other copolymerization components are, for example, 0.01 wt% or less. To some extent, unintentional inclusion is acceptable.
  • Acrylic polymers are polyfunctional having at least two polymerizable functional groups (typically radically polymerizable functional groups) having unsaturated double bonds such as (meth)acryloyl groups and vinyl groups as other monomer components. It may contain a monomer. By using a polyfunctional monomer as the monomer component, the cohesive force of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer can be increased.
  • Polyfunctional monomers can be used as cross-linking agents. Polyfunctional monomers are not particularly limited, and examples include 1,6-hexanediol di(meth)acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate, and neopentyl glycol di(meth)acrylate. etc.
  • a polyfunctional monomer can be used individually by 1 type or in combination of 2 or more types.
  • the amount of polyfunctional monomer used is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set so that the purpose of use of the polyfunctional monomer is achieved.
  • the amount of the polyfunctional monomer used can be approximately 3% by weight or less, preferably approximately 2% by weight or less, and more preferably approximately 1% by weight or less (for example, approximately 0.5% by weight or less) based on the above monomer components.
  • the lower limit of the amount used when using a polyfunctional monomer is not particularly limited as long as it is greater than 0% by weight. Usually, by setting the amount of the polyfunctional monomer used to about 0.001% by weight or more (for example, about 0.01% by weight or more) of the monomer component, the effect of using the polyfunctional monomer can be appropriately exhibited.
  • the composition of the monomer components constituting the acrylic polymer is designed so that the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the acrylic polymer is approximately ⁇ 15° C. or lower (for example, approximately ⁇ 70° C. or higher and ⁇ 15° C. or lower). is appropriate.
  • Tg of the acrylic polymer refers to the Tg determined by the Fox formula based on the composition of the monomer components.
  • the Fox equation is a relational expression between the Tg of a copolymer and the glass transition temperature Tgi of a homopolymer obtained by homopolymerizing each of the monomers constituting the copolymer, as shown below.
  • Tg is the glass transition temperature of the copolymer (unit: K)
  • Wi is the weight fraction of the monomer i in the copolymer (copolymerization ratio based on weight)
  • Tgi is the content of the monomer i. It represents the glass transition temperature (unit: K) of a homopolymer.
  • the glass transition temperature of the homopolymer used for calculating the Tg the value described in the known materials shall be used.
  • the monomers listed below the following values are used as the glass transition temperatures of the homopolymers of the monomers.
  • the Tg of the acrylic polymer is advantageously about ⁇ 25° C. or less, preferably about ⁇ 35° C. or less, more preferably about ⁇
  • the temperature is 40° C. or lower, more preferably -45° C. or lower, and may be -50° C. or lower, or -55° C. or lower.
  • the Tg of the acrylic polymer is usually about -75°C or higher, preferably about -70°C or higher.
  • the Tg of the acrylic polymer may be ⁇ 60° C. or lower, or ⁇ 62° C. or lower (eg, ⁇ 64° C. or lower).
  • the Tg of the acrylic polymer may be about ⁇ 65° C. or higher, or about ⁇ 60° C. or higher (for example, about ⁇ 55° C. or higher).
  • the Tg of the acrylic polymer can be adjusted by appropriately changing the monomer composition (that is, the types and usage ratios of the monomers used in synthesizing the polymer).
  • the weight average molecular weight Mw of the base polymer disclosed herein is preferably about 30 ⁇ 10 4 or more, more preferably 40 ⁇ 10 4 or more (e.g. 45 ⁇ 10 4 or more), still more preferably It is about 50 ⁇ 10 4 or more, particularly preferably about 55 ⁇ 10 4 or more (for example, about 58 ⁇ 10 4 or more). Moreover, the above Mw is usually about 300 ⁇ 10 4 or less, and about 200 ⁇ 10 4 or less is suitable. From the viewpoint of improving flexibility, Mw is preferably about 100 ⁇ 10 4 or less, and may be about 70 ⁇ 10 4 or less (for example, about 65 ⁇ 10 4 or less).
  • the base polymer one or more of the various polymers exemplified as the rubber-like polymer can be used.
  • an acrylic polymer obtained by a solution polymerization method preferably has Mw within the above range.
  • the dispersion (Mw/Mn) of the base polymer (preferably acrylic polymer) disclosed herein is not particularly limited.
  • the dispersity (Mw/Mn) here means the dispersity (Mw/Mn) represented by the ratio of the weight average molecular weight (Mw) to the number average molecular weight (Mn).
  • the dispersity (Mw/Mn) of the base polymer is 50 or less, may be less than 45, may be less than 40 (e.g., 38 or less), may be less than 35, or may be less than 32. .
  • the lower limit of Mw/Mn is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, 3.0 or more, 5.0 or more, or 7.0 or more.
  • the lower limit of Mw/Mn is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, 3.0 or more, 5.0 or more, or 7.0 or more.
  • Mw, Mn and Mw/Mn are polymerization conditions (time, temperature, etc.), non-volatile matter (monomer component) concentration during polymerization, amount of polymerization initiator used, use of chain transfer agent, polymerization based on chain transfer constant It can be adjusted by selecting a solvent or the like.
  • Mw and Mn are obtained from values converted to standard polystyrene obtained by GPC (gel permeation chromatography).
  • GPC gel permeation chromatography
  • the method for obtaining the base polymer is not particularly limited, and various known polymer synthesis methods such as solution polymerization, emulsion polymerization, bulk polymerization, suspension polymerization, and photopolymerization can be used. can be appropriately adopted polymerization method.
  • a solution polymerization method can be preferably employed.
  • the polymerization temperature at the time of solution polymerization can be appropriately selected according to the type of monomer and solvent used, the type of polymerization initiator, etc. ° C.).
  • the solvent (polymerization solvent) used for solution polymerization can be appropriately selected from conventionally known organic solvents (toluene, ethyl acetate, etc.).
  • the initiator used for polymerization may be a conventionally known polymerization initiator (for example, an azo polymerization initiator such as 2,2'-azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN) or a peroxide polymerization initiator). initiator, etc.).
  • the amount of the polymerization initiator used may be a normal amount, for example, about 0.005 to 1 part by weight (typically about 0.01 to 1 part by weight) per 100 parts by weight of the monomer component. ).
  • the adhesive layer in the technology disclosed herein can contain a tackifying resin. Thereby, the peel strength of the adhesive sheet can be increased.
  • tackifying resins include phenol-based tackifying resins, terpene-based tackifying resins, modified terpene-based tackifying resins, rosin-based tackifying resins, hydrocarbon-based tackifying resins, epoxy-based tackifying resins, polyamide-based tackifying resins, One or more selected from tackifier resins such as elastomer-based tackifier resins and ketone-based tackifier resins can be used.
  • phenol-based tackifying resins terpene-based tackifying resins, and modified terpene-based tackifying resins are preferable, and phenol-based tackifying resins (preferably terpene phenolic resins) are more preferable.
  • phenolic tackifying resins include terpene phenolic resins, hydrogenated terpene phenolic resins, alkylphenolic resins and rosin phenolic resins.
  • Terpene phenol resin refers to a polymer containing a terpene residue and a phenol residue, a copolymer of terpenes and a phenol compound (terpene-phenol copolymer resin), and a homopolymer or copolymer of terpenes is a concept that includes both phenol-modified (phenol-modified terpene resin).
  • terpenes constituting such a terpene phenol resin include monoterpenes such as ⁇ -pinene, ⁇ -pinene, and limonene (including d-, l- and d/l-forms (dipentene)).
  • a hydrogenated terpene phenol resin refers to a hydrogenated terpene phenol resin having a structure obtained by hydrogenating such a terpene phenol resin. It is sometimes called a hydrogenated terpene phenolic resin.
  • Alkylphenol resins are resins obtained from alkylphenols and formaldehyde (oily phenolic resins). Examples of alkylphenol resins include novolac and resole types.
  • Rosin phenolic resins are typically rosins or phenol-modified products of the various rosin derivatives described above (including rosin esters, unsaturated fatty acid-modified rosins, and unsaturated fatty acid-modified rosin esters).
  • rosin phenol resins include rosin phenol resins obtained by a method of adding phenol to rosins or various rosin derivatives described above with an acid catalyst and thermally polymerizing the mixture.
  • terpene-based tackifying resins include polymers of terpenes (typically monoterpenes) such as ⁇ -pinene, ⁇ -pinene, d-limonene, l-limonene and dipentene. It may be a homopolymer of one kind of terpenes, or a copolymer of two or more kinds of terpenes.
  • terpene homopolymer includes ⁇ -pinene polymer, ⁇ -pinene polymer, dipentene polymer and the like.
  • modified terpene resins include those obtained by modifying the above terpene resins. Specific examples include styrene-modified terpene resins and hydrogenated terpene resins.
  • rosin-based tackifying resins here includes both rosins and rosin derivative resins.
  • rosins include unmodified rosins (fresh rosins) such as gum rosin, wood rosin and tall oil rosin; homogenized rosin, polymerized rosin, other chemically modified rosins, etc.);
  • the rosin derivative resin is typically a derivative of the above rosins.
  • the term "rosin-based resin” as used herein includes derivatives of unmodified rosin and derivatives of modified rosin (including hydrogenated rosin, disproportionated rosin and polymerized rosin).
  • rosin esters such as undenatured rosin esters, which are esters of undenatured rosin and alcohols, and denatured rosin esters, which are esters of denatured rosin and alcohols; Saturated fatty acid-modified rosins; for example, unsaturated fatty acid-modified rosin esters obtained by modifying rosin esters with unsaturated fatty acids; rosin alcohols obtained by reducing the carboxy group of rosin esters modified with fatty acids; for example, rosins or metal salts of the various rosin derivatives described above; Specific examples of rosin esters include methyl esters, triethylene glycol esters, glycerin esters and pentaerythritol esters of unmodified rosins or modified rosins (hydrogenated rosins, disproportionated rosins, polymerized rosins, etc.).
  • hydrocarbon tackifying resins examples include aliphatic hydrocarbon resins, aromatic hydrocarbon resins, aliphatic cyclic hydrocarbon resins, aliphatic/aromatic petroleum resins (styrene-olefin copolymers, etc. ), aliphatic/alicyclic petroleum resins, hydrogenated hydrocarbon resins, coumarone-based resins, and coumarone-indene-based resins.
  • the softening point of the tackifying resin is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of improving cohesive strength, a tackifier resin having a softening point (softening temperature) of about 80° C. or higher (preferably about 100° C. or higher) can be preferably used. For example, a phenol-based tackifying resin (terpene phenol resin, etc.) having such a softening point can be preferably used. In some embodiments, terpene phenolic resins with softening points of about 135° C. or higher (or even about 140° C. or higher) can be used. There is no particular upper limit for the softening point of the tackifying resin. A tackifying resin having a softening point of about 200° C.
  • the softening point of the tackifying resin can be measured based on the softening point test method (ring and ball method) specified in JIS K2207.
  • the tackifying resin contains one or more phenolic tackifying resins (typically terpene phenolic resins).
  • the technology disclosed herein can be preferably implemented in a mode in which, for example, about 25% by weight or more (more preferably about 30% by weight or more) of the total amount of tackifying resin is 100% by weight is a terpene phenol resin.
  • About 50% by weight or more of the total amount of tackifying resin may be the terpene phenolic resin, and about 70% by weight or more (eg, about 80% by weight or more) may be the terpene phenolic resin.
  • Substantially all of the tackifying resin eg, about 95-100 wt%, or even about 99-100 wt%) may be a terpene phenolic resin.
  • the tackifying resin may include a tackifying resin having a hydroxyl value higher than 20 mgKOH/g. Among them, a tackifying resin having a hydroxyl value of 30 mgKOH/g or more is preferable. Hereinafter, a tackifying resin having a hydroxyl value of 30 mgKOH/g or more may be referred to as a "high hydroxyl value resin".
  • a tackifying resin containing such a high hydroxyl value resin e.g., a phenolic tackifying resin, preferably a terpene phenolic resin
  • the upper limit of the hydroxyl value of the high hydroxyl value resin is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of compatibility with the base polymer, the hydroxyl value of the high hydroxyl value resin is suitably about 200 mgKOH/g or less, preferably about 100 mgKOH/g or less, and may be about 70 mgKOH/g or less. , approximately 65 mg KOH/g or less. High hydroxyl value resin can be used individually by 1 type or in combination of 2 or more types.
  • a value measured by a potentiometric titration method specified in JIS K0070:1992 can be adopted.
  • a specific measuring method is as follows. [Method for measuring hydroxyl value] 1.
  • Reagent (1) As the acetylation reagent, approximately 12.5 g (approximately 11.8 mL) of acetic anhydride is taken, pyridine is added to bring the total amount to 50 mL, and the mixture is thoroughly stirred and used. Alternatively, take about 25 g (about 23.5 mL) of acetic anhydride, add pyridine to bring the total amount to 100 mL, and use the mixture after thorough stirring.
  • Hydroxyl value [(BC) x f x 28.05]/S + D here
  • B Amount (mL) of 0.5 mol/L potassium hydroxide ethanol solution used in the blank test
  • C Amount (mL) of 0.5 mol/L potassium hydroxide ethanol solution used for the sample
  • f factor of 0.5 mol/L potassium hydroxide ethanol solution
  • S weight of sample (g)
  • D acid value
  • 28.05 1 ⁇ 2 of the molecular weight of potassium hydroxide, 56.11; is.
  • the amount (total amount) of the tackifying resin used is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set, for example, in the range of about 1 to 100 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. .
  • the amount of the tackifying resin to be used with respect to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer is suitably 5 parts by weight or more, and 10 parts by weight or more. , and may be 15 parts by weight or more.
  • the amount of tackifying resin to be used with respect to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer is preferably 50 parts by weight or less, and may be 40 parts by weight or less. Well, it may be 30 parts by weight or less.
  • the adhesive composition used for forming the adhesive layer may contain a cross-linking agent as needed.
  • the type of cross-linking agent is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately selected from conventionally known cross-linking agents.
  • examples of such cross-linking agents include isocyanate-based cross-linking agents, epoxy-based cross-linking agents, oxazoline-based cross-linking agents, aziridine-based cross-linking agents, melamine-based cross-linking agents, peroxide-based cross-linking agents, urea-based cross-linking agents, and metal alkoxide-based cross-linking agents.
  • Cross-linking agents metal chelate-based cross-linking agents, metal salt-based cross-linking agents, carbodiimide-based cross-linking agents, hydrazine-based cross-linking agents, amine-based cross-linking agents, silane coupling agents, and the like.
  • isocyanate-based cross-linking agents isocyanate-based cross-linking agents, epoxy-based cross-linking agents, oxazoline-based cross-linking agents, aziridine-based cross-linking agents, and melamine-based cross-linking agents are preferable, isocyanate-based cross-linking agents and epoxy-based cross-linking agents are more preferable, and isocyanate-based cross-linking agents are particularly preferable. .
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer in the technology disclosed herein contains the cross-linking agent in the form after the cross-linking reaction, the form before the cross-linking reaction, the form after the cross-linking reaction, the intermediate or composite form thereof, and the like. can contain The cross-linking agent is typically contained in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer exclusively in the form after the cross-linking reaction.
  • a polyfunctional isocyanate meaning a compound having an average of two or more isocyanate groups per molecule, including those having an isocyanurate structure
  • the isocyanate-based cross-linking agents may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • polyfunctional isocyanates include aliphatic polyisocyanates, alicyclic polyisocyanates, and aromatic polyisocyanates.
  • aliphatic polyisocyanates include 1,2-ethylene diisocyanate; tetramethylene diisocyanates such as 1,2-tetramethylene diisocyanate, 1,3-tetramethylene diisocyanate and 1,4-tetramethylene diisocyanate; - hexamethylene diisocyanates such as hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,3-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,4-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,5-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,6-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 2,5-hexamethylene diisocyanate; 2-methyl-1,5-pentane diisocyanate, 3-methyl-1,5-pentane diisocyanate, lysine diisocyanate and the like.
  • alicyclic polyisocyanates include isophorone diisocyanate; cyclohexyl diisocyanates such as 1,2-cyclohexyl diisocyanate, 1,3-cyclohexyl diisocyanate and 1,4-cyclohexyl diisocyanate; 1,2-cyclopentyl diisocyanate, 1,3 - cyclopentyl diisocyanate such as cyclopentyl diisocyanate; hydrogenated xylylene diisocyanate, hydrogenated tolylene diisocyanate, hydrogenated diphenylmethane diisocyanate, hydrogenated tetramethylxylene diisocyanate, 4,4'-dicyclohexylmethane diisocyanate and the like.
  • aromatic polyisocyanates include 2,4-tolylene diisocyanate, 2,6-tolylene diisocyanate, 4,4'-diphenylmethane diisocyanate, 2,4'-diphenylmethane diisocyanate, and 2,2'-diphenylmethane diisocyanate.
  • polyfunctional isocyanates examples include polyfunctional isocyanates having an average of 3 or more isocyanate groups per molecule.
  • Such tri- or more functional isocyanates are polymers (typically dimers or trimers) of di- or tri- or more functional isocyanates, derivatives (for example, polyhydric alcohols and two or more molecules of polyfunctional isocyanates). addition reaction products), polymers, and the like.
  • polyfunctional isocyanates such as reaction products with methylene diisocyanate, polymethylene polyphenyl isocyanate, polyether polyisocyanate and polyester polyisocyanate can be mentioned.
  • polyfunctional isocyanates include “Duranate TPA-100” (trade name) manufactured by Asahi Kasei Chemicals, "Coronate L” (trade name), “Coronate HL”, “Coronate HK” (trade name) and “Coronate HK” (trade names) manufactured by Tosoh Corporation. HX”, “Coronate 2096", and the like.
  • the amount of the isocyanate-based cross-linking agent used is not particularly limited. For example, it can be about 0.1 part by weight or more with respect to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. From the viewpoint of compatibility between cohesive strength and adhesion, impact resistance, etc., the amount of the isocyanate-based cross-linking agent used relative to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer can be, for example, more than 0.3 parts by weight, preferably 0.5 parts by weight. It is at least 0.75 parts by weight, more preferably at least 1.0 parts by weight (for example, at least 1.2 parts by weight).
  • the amount of the isocyanate-based cross-linking agent used is appropriately 10 parts by weight or less, preferably 7 parts by weight, per 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. Less than 5 parts by weight, more preferably less than 4.5 parts by weight, particularly preferably less than 4 parts by weight.
  • an isocyanate-based cross-linking agent and at least one cross-linking agent having a different type of cross-linkable functional group from the isocyanate-based cross-linking agent are used in combination as the cross-linking agent.
  • a cross-linking agent other than an isocyanate-based cross-linking agent that is, a cross-linking agent having a different type of cross-linkable reactive group from the isocyanate-based cross-linking agent; hereinafter also referred to as a “non-isocyanate cross-linking agent”
  • an isocyanate cross-linking agent can be used in combination with a system cross-linking agent.
  • non-isocyanate-based cross-linking agent that can be used in combination with the isocyanate-based cross-linking agent is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately selected from the above-described cross-linking agents.
  • the non-isocyanate-based cross-linking agents may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • an epoxy-based cross-linking agent can be employed as the non-isocyanate-based cross-linking agent.
  • an isocyanate-based cross-linking agent and an epoxy-based cross-linking agent in combination it is easy to achieve both cohesiveness and impact resistance.
  • the epoxy-based cross-linking agent a compound having two or more epoxy groups in one molecule can be used without particular limitation.
  • An epoxy-based cross-linking agent having 3 to 5 epoxy groups in one molecule is preferred.
  • Epoxy-based cross-linking agents may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • epoxy-based cross-linking agents include, but are not limited to, N,N,N',N'-tetraglycidyl-m-xylenediamine, 1,3-bis(N,N-diglycidylaminomethyl ) cyclohexane, 1,6-hexanediol diglycidyl ether, polyethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, polyglycerol polyglycidyl ether and the like.
  • Commercially available epoxy-based cross-linking agents include Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Co., Ltd.'s trade name "TETRAD-C” and trade name “TETRAD-X”, DIC's trade name "Epiclon CR-5L", and Nagase ChemteX Corp. and "TEPIC-G” manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd. under the trade name of "Denacol EX-512".
  • the amount of epoxy-based cross-linking agent used is not particularly limited.
  • the amount of the epoxy-based cross-linking agent used is, for example, more than 0 parts by weight and about 1 part by weight or less (typically about 0.001 to 0.5 parts by weight) with respect to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. can be done.
  • the amount of the epoxy-based cross-linking agent to be used is preferably about 0.005 parts by weight or more per 100 parts by weight of the base polymer.
  • the amount of the epoxy-based cross-linking agent used is appropriately about 0.2 parts by weight or less with respect to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. It is preferably 0.1 part by weight or less, more preferably less than about 0.05 part by weight.
  • the total amount (total amount) of the cross-linking agent used is not particularly limited. For example, it can be about 10 parts by weight or less, preferably about 0.005 to 10 parts by weight, more preferably about 0.01 to 5 parts by weight, based on 100 parts by weight of the base polymer (preferably acrylic polymer). can be selected from a range of
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disclosed herein may or may not contain a coloring agent that can help reduce light transmittance.
  • a coloring agent that can help reduce light transmittance.
  • Conventionally known pigments and dyes can be used as the colorant.
  • As the color of the coloring agent colored is preferable.
  • the color of the coloring agent can be, for example, black, gray, red, blue, yellow, green, yellow-green, orange, purple, gold, silver, pearlescent, and the like.
  • a colored coloring agent can impart light-shielding properties and design properties.
  • the coloring agent may or may not contain a colorless coloring agent in combination with a colored coloring agent.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer according to one typical aspect disclosed herein may be substantially free of colorless coloring agents.
  • colored is a meaning including black and metallic color.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may have a multilayer structure including a colored layer containing a coloring agent.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may contain the colorant in a substantially dispersed state (it may be in a dissolved state).
  • pigments and dyes can be used as the coloring agent.
  • pigments include zinc carbonate, zinc oxide, zinc sulfide, talc, kaolin, calcium carbonate, titanium oxide, silica, lithium fluoride, calcium fluoride, barium sulfate, alumina, zirconia, iron oxide, and iron hydroxide.
  • Chromium oxide type Spinel type firing type, Chromic acid type, Chromium vermillion type, Prussian blue type, Aluminum powder type, Bronze powder type, Silver powder type, Inorganic pigment such as calcium phosphate, Phthalocyanine type, Azo type, Condensed azo type , azo lake-based, anthraquinone-based, perylene/perinone-based, indigo-based, thioindigo-based, isoindolinone-based, azomethine-based, dioxazine-based, quinacridone-based, aniline black-based, triphenylmethane-based, and carbon black-based organic pigments. be done.
  • Inorganic pigment such as calcium phosphate, Phthalocyanine type, Azo type, Condensed azo type , azo lake-based, anthraquinone-based, perylene/perinone-based, indigo-based, thioindigo-based, isoindolinone-based
  • dyes examples include azo dyes, anthraquinone, quinophthalone, styryl, diphenylmethane, triphenylmethane, oxazine, triazine, xanthan, methane, azomethine, acridine, and diazine. Colorants may be used singly or in appropriate combination of two or more.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer contains a black colorant.
  • a black colorant As the black colorant contained in the adhesive layer, an organic or inorganic colorant (pigment, dye, etc.) can be used. Specific examples of black colorants include carbon black (furnace black, channel black, acetylene black, thermal black, lamp black, pine smoke, etc.), graphite, copper oxide, manganese dioxide, aniline black, perylene black, titanium black, and cyanine.
  • Carbon black is preferred.
  • As the carbon black particles it is also possible to use surface-modified carbon black particles having functional groups such as carboxyl groups, amino groups, sulfonic acid groups, silicon-containing groups (e.g., alkoxysilyl groups and alkylsilyl groups). .
  • Such surface-modified carbon black particles are also called self-dispersing carbon black, and the addition of a dispersant becomes unnecessary or the amount thereof can be reduced.
  • the carbon black particles may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • the black colorant is not particularly limited, and a particulate colorant (pigment) can be preferably used.
  • a black colorant eg, a black pigment such as carbon black
  • the upper limit of the average particle size of the black colorant is not particularly limited, and is usually about 500 nm or less, preferably about 300 nm or less, more preferably about 250 nm or less, for example 200 nm or less (for example, about 120 nm or less).
  • the "average particle size” in this specification means the particle size at 50% of the integrated value in the particle size distribution measured based on the particle size distribution measuring device based on the laser scattering/diffraction method (50% volume mean particle diameter; hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as D50 ).
  • the amount of the coloring agent (solid content) used in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is not particularly limited, and the amount can be appropriately adjusted so as to impart the desired light-shielding properties.
  • the amount of the black colorant used is usually about 0.1 to 30% by weight of the total weight of the adhesive layer, for example 0.1 to 25% by weight (typically 0.1 to 30% by weight). 20% by weight).
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may contain an antirust agent.
  • Rust inhibitors are not particularly limited, and include azole rust inhibitors, amine compounds, nitrites, ammonium benzoate, ammonium phthalate, ammonium stearate, ammonium palmitate, ammonium oleate, ammonium carbonate, and dicyclohexylamine benzoate. acid salts, urea, urotropine, thiourea, phenyl carbamate, cyclohexylammonium-N-cyclohexylcarbamate (CHC) and the like.
  • the rust preventives can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • an azole-based rust inhibitor can be preferably used.
  • a five-membered ring aromatic compound containing two or more heteroatoms, in which at least one of the heteroatoms is a nitrogen atom is preferably used as an active ingredient.
  • compounds that can be used as azole rust inhibitors include benzotriazole rust inhibitors containing benzotriazole compounds as active ingredients.
  • benzotriazole compounds include 1,2,3-benzotriazole, 5-methylbenzotriazole, 4-methylbenzotriazole, carboxybenzotriazole and the like.
  • the content of the rust inhibitor is not particularly limited, and can be, for example, 0.01 parts by weight or more (typically 0.05 parts by weight or more) with respect to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. From the viewpoint of obtaining a better metal corrosion prevention effect, the content may be 0.1 parts by weight or more, 0.3 parts by weight or more, or 0.5 parts by weight or more. On the other hand, from the viewpoint of increasing the cohesive strength of the pressure-sensitive adhesive, the content of the rust inhibitor is preferably less than 8 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. It may be less than part.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition may optionally contain adhesive agents such as leveling agents, cross-linking aids, plasticizers, softeners, fillers, antistatic agents, anti-aging agents, ultraviolet absorbers, antioxidants, light stabilizers, and the like.
  • adhesive agents such as leveling agents, cross-linking aids, plasticizers, softeners, fillers, antistatic agents, anti-aging agents, ultraviolet absorbers, antioxidants, light stabilizers, and the like.
  • Various additives common in the pharmaceutical field may be included. As for the various additives mentioned above, conventionally known ones can be used in a conventional manner, and since they do not particularly characterize the present invention, detailed description thereof will be omitted.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (layer made of pressure-sensitive adhesive) disclosed herein is a water-based pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, a solvent-based pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, a hot-melt pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, and active energy rays such as ultraviolet rays and electron beams. It may be a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer formed from an active energy ray-curable pressure-sensitive adhesive composition that is cured by irradiation.
  • the water-based pressure-sensitive adhesive composition refers to a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition in the form of containing a pressure-sensitive adhesive (adhesive layer-forming component) in a water-based solvent (aqueous solvent), typically water-dispersed.
  • the solvent-type adhesive composition refers to an adhesive composition in the form of containing an adhesive in an organic solvent.
  • the organic solvent contained in the solvent-based pressure-sensitive adhesive composition one or two or more of the organic solvents (toluene, ethyl acetate, etc.) exemplified as the organic solvent (toluene, ethyl acetate, etc.) that can be used in the above solution polymerization can be used without particular limitation.
  • the technology disclosed herein can be preferably practiced in a mode comprising a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer formed from a solvent-based pressure-sensitive adhesive composition.
  • a solvent-based pressure-sensitive adhesive layer formed from a solvent-based pressure-sensitive adhesive composition the effects of the technique disclosed herein are preferably achieved.
  • the adhesive layer disclosed here can be formed by a conventionally known method.
  • a method of forming a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer by applying a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition to a surface having releasability (release surface) and drying can be employed.
  • a pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet having a substrate for example, a method (direct method) of forming a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer by directly applying (typically applying) a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition to the substrate and drying it can be employed.
  • a method of applying a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition to a surface having releasability (release surface) and drying to form a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on the surface and transferring the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer to a substrate transfer method.
  • the release surface for example, the surface of a release liner, which will be described later, can be preferably used.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disclosed herein is typically formed continuously, but is not limited to such a form. It may be a formed pressure-sensitive adhesive layer.
  • the adhesive composition can be performed using a conventionally known coater such as a gravure roll coater, a die coater, and a bar coater.
  • the adhesive composition may be applied by impregnation, curtain coating, or the like.
  • the drying temperature can be, for example, about 40 to 150.degree. C., preferably about 60 to 130.degree.
  • After drying the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition it may be further aged for the purpose of adjusting migration of components in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, progressing the crosslinking reaction, relaxing strain that may exist in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, and the like.
  • the adhesive layer disclosed herein may have a single layer structure or a multilayer structure of two or more layers. From the viewpoint of productivity and the like, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer preferably has a single-layer structure.
  • the thickness of the adhesive layer is not particularly limited.
  • the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is usually about 300 ⁇ m or less, suitably about 150 ⁇ m or less, preferably about 100 ⁇ m or less, more preferably about 70 ⁇ m or less, and about 60 ⁇ m or less (for example, 55 ⁇ m or less). good too.
  • a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer with a limited thickness can well meet demands for thinning and weight reduction.
  • the lower limit of the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of adhesiveness and conformability to an adherend, it is, for example, about 3 ⁇ m or more, and about 10 ⁇ m or more is suitable.
  • the thickness of the adhesive layer is approximately 20 ⁇ m or greater, more preferably approximately 30 ⁇ m or greater, and may be approximately 40 ⁇ m or greater.
  • the thickness of each pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be the same or different.
  • the gel fraction of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disclosed herein can be, for example, 20% or more on a weight basis, and usually 30% or more is suitable. % is preferred. By increasing the gel fraction of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer within an appropriate range, the conformability to the adherend can be improved.
  • the gel fraction is more preferably 45% or higher, still more preferably 50% or higher, particularly preferably 55% or higher, and may be 60% or higher.
  • the gel fraction of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is suitably 90% or less, preferably 70% or less (for example, 65% or less), and may be less than 60%. .
  • the "gel fraction of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer” refers to a value measured by the following method.
  • the gel fraction can be grasped as the weight ratio of ethyl acetate-insoluble matter in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer.
  • Weight Wg 1 An adhesive sample of about 0.1 g (weight Wg 1 ) is wrapped in a porous polytetrafluoroethylene membrane (weight Wg 2 ) having an average pore size of 0.2 ⁇ m, and the opening is tied with a string (weight Wg 3 ).
  • porous polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) membrane trade name "Nitoflon (registered trademark) NTF1122” available from Nitto Denko Corporation (average pore size 0.2 ⁇ m, porosity 75%, thickness 85 ⁇ m) or equivalent use the product.
  • This package was immersed in 50 mL of ethyl acetate and kept at room temperature (typically 23° C.) for 7 days to elute only the sol component in the adhesive layer outside the film. The adhering ethyl acetate is wiped off, the packet is dried at 130° C. for 2 hours, and the weight (Wg 4 ) of the packet is measured.
  • the gel fraction FG of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is obtained by substituting each value into the following formula. A similar method is adopted in the examples described later.
  • Gel fraction F G (%) [(Wg 4 -Wg 2 -Wg 3 )/Wg 1 ] ⁇ 100
  • the adhesive sheet disclosed herein may contain a substrate (supporting substrate).
  • the structure and material of the substrate disclosed herein are not particularly limited.
  • the base material is typically a film-like base material (also referred to as "base film").
  • base film a base film containing a resin film can be preferably used.
  • the base film is typically an independently shape-maintainable (independent) member.
  • the base film in the technique disclosed here can be substantially composed of such a base film.
  • the base film may contain an auxiliary layer in addition to the base film. Examples of the auxiliary layer include a colored layer, a reflective layer, an undercoat layer, an antistatic layer, etc. provided on the surface of the base film.
  • the resin film is a film containing a resin material as a main component (for example, a component contained in the resin film in excess of 50% by weight).
  • resin films include polyolefin resin films such as polyethylene (PE), polypropylene (PP), and ethylene/propylene copolymer; polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polybutylene terephthalate (PBT), polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), and the like.
  • polyurethane resin film vinyl chloride resin film; vinyl acetate resin film; polyimide resin film; polyamide resin film;
  • the resin film may be a rubber-based film such as a natural rubber film or a butyl rubber film. Among them, from the viewpoint of handleability and workability, a polyester film is preferred, and a PET film is particularly preferred.
  • the base film may be colored with a colored layer arranged on the surface of the base film (preferably resin film).
  • a base film having a structure including a colored layer in this way can impart light-shielding properties and design properties.
  • the base film may or may not contain a colorant.
  • the colored layer may be arranged on either one surface of the base film, or may be arranged on both surfaces. In the configuration in which the colored layers are arranged on both surfaces of the base film, the configurations of the colored layers may be the same or different.
  • Such a colored layer can typically be formed by coating a base film with a colored layer-forming composition containing a coloring agent and a binder.
  • a coloring agent Conventionally known pigments and dyes can be used as the colorant.
  • the color of the coloring agent colored is preferred.
  • the color of the coloring agent can be, for example, black, gray, red, blue, yellow, green, yellow-green, orange, purple, gold, silver, pearlescent, and the like.
  • a colored coloring agent can impart light-shielding properties and design properties.
  • the coloring agent may or may not contain a colorless coloring agent in combination with a colored coloring agent.
  • a base film according to a typical aspect disclosed herein may be substantially free of a colorless colorant.
  • colored is a meaning including black and metallic color.
  • the term “colorless” is meant to include white.
  • binder materials known in the field of paints or printing can be used without particular limitation. Examples include polyurethane, phenol resin, epoxy resin, urea melamine resin, polymethyl methacrylate, and the like.
  • the composition for forming a colored layer may be, for example, a solvent type, an ultraviolet curable type, a heat curable type, or the like.
  • the formation of the colored layer can be carried out by adopting means conventionally used for forming the colored layer without particular limitation. For example, a method of forming a colored layer (printed layer) by printing such as gravure printing, flexographic printing, and offset printing can be preferably employed.
  • the colored layer may have a single layer structure consisting entirely of one layer, or may have a multilayer structure including two, three or more sub-colored layers.
  • a colored layer having a multi-layer structure including two or more sub-colored layers can be formed, for example, by repeatedly applying (for example, printing) a composition for forming a colored layer.
  • the colors and blending amounts of the colorants contained in each sub-colored layer may be the same or different.
  • the thickness of the entire colored layer is usually suitably about 1 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m, preferably about 1 ⁇ m to 7 ⁇ m, and can be, for example, about 1 ⁇ m to 5 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness of each sub-colored layer is preferably about 1 ⁇ m to 2 ⁇ m.
  • the base film may contain a coloring agent.
  • a base film containing a coloring agent in this way can impart light-shielding properties and design properties.
  • Conventionally known pigments and dyes can be used as the colorant to be contained in the base film.
  • the base film is a base film containing a black colorant, more specifically a resin film into which a black colorant is kneaded.
  • the base film in which the black colorant is kneaded means that the black colorant is mixed in the main constituent material of the base film (the material most contained in the base film, typically a resin material). It refers to a base film that has been coated.
  • the black colorant is substantially dispersed in the base film.
  • An organic or inorganic colorant can be used as the black colorant contained in the base film.
  • black colorants include carbon black (furnace black, channel black, acetylene black, thermal black, lamp black, pine smoke, etc.), graphite, copper oxide, manganese dioxide, aniline black, perylene black, titanium black, and cyanine.
  • Black activated carbon, ferrite (non-magnetic ferrite, magnetic ferrite, etc.), magnetite, chromium oxide, iron oxide, molybdenum disulfide, chromium complexes, anthraquinone colorants, and the like.
  • carbon black is preferred.
  • the black colorant is not particularly limited, and a particulate colorant (pigment) can be preferably used.
  • a black colorant eg, a black pigment such as carbon black
  • the upper limit of the average particle size of the black colorant is not particularly limited, and is usually about 500 nm or less, preferably about 300 nm or less, more preferably about 250 nm or less, for example 200 nm or less (for example, about 120 nm or less).
  • the amount of the coloring agent used in the base film is not particularly limited, and the amount can be appropriately adjusted so as to impart the desired light-shielding properties.
  • the amount of the black colorant used is usually about 0.1 to 30% by weight of the total weight of the base film, for example 0.1 to 25% by weight (typically 0.1 to 30% by weight). 20% by weight).
  • the base film disclosed herein may contain coloring agents (pigments and dyes) other than black coloring agents.
  • non-black colorants include, for example, white colorants.
  • White colorants include, for example, titanium oxide (titanium dioxide such as rutile-type titanium dioxide and anatase-type titanium dioxide), zinc oxide, aluminum oxide, silicon oxide, zirconium oxide, magnesium oxide, calcium oxide, tin oxide, barium oxide, Cesium oxide, yttrium oxide, magnesium carbonate, calcium carbonate (light calcium carbonate, heavy calcium carbonate, etc.), barium carbonate, zinc carbonate, aluminum hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, magnesium hydroxide, zinc hydroxide, aluminum silicate, magnesium silicate , calcium silicate, barium sulfate, calcium sulfate, barium stearate, zinc oxide, zinc sulfide, talc, silica, alumina, clay, kaolin, titanium phosphate, mica, gypsum, white carbon, diatomaceous earth, be
  • the amount of the non-black colorant used in the base film is not particularly limited, and the amount can be appropriately adjusted so as to impart the desired light-shielding properties.
  • the amount of the non-black colorant used is usually about 0.1 to 30% by weight of the resin film, for example 0.1 to 25% by weight (typically 0.1 to 20% by weight). % by weight).
  • the base film may contain fillers (inorganic fillers, organic fillers, etc.), dispersants (surfactants, etc.), anti-aging agents, antioxidants, ultraviolet absorbers, antistatic agents, Various additives such as lubricants and plasticizers may be added.
  • the blending ratio of various additives is usually about less than 30% by weight (for example, less than 20% by weight, typically less than 10% by weight).
  • the base film may have a single-layer structure, or may have a multi-layer structure of two layers, three layers or more. From the viewpoint of shape stability, the substrate film preferably has a single-layer structure. In the case of a multilayer structure, at least one layer (preferably all layers) is preferably a layer having a continuous structure of the resin (for example, polyester resin).
  • the method for producing the substrate film is not particularly limited, and any conventionally known method may be appropriately adopted. For example, conventionally known general film forming methods such as extrusion molding, inflation molding, T-die casting, and calender roll molding can be employed as appropriate.
  • the thickness of the base material disclosed here is not particularly limited.
  • the thickness of the substrate is usually 3 ⁇ m or more, preferably 5 ⁇ m or more (for example, 10 ⁇ m or more). In some embodiments, the thickness of the substrate may be 20 ⁇ m or greater, 30 ⁇ m or greater, 40 ⁇ m or greater, 100 ⁇ m or greater, 200 ⁇ m or greater.
  • the thickness of the substrate is usually 500 ⁇ m or less, preferably 400 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 300 ⁇ m or less from the viewpoint of weight reduction. In some aspects, the thickness of the substrate may be 250 ⁇ m or less, 200 ⁇ m or less, 150 ⁇ m or less, 100 ⁇ m or less, or 50 ⁇ m or less.
  • the thickness of the substrate may be the total thickness of the base film and the colored layer.
  • the surface of the base film may be subjected to conventionally known surface treatments such as corona discharge treatment, plasma treatment, ultraviolet irradiation treatment, acid treatment, alkali treatment, application of a primer, and the like.
  • a surface treatment can be a treatment for improving the adhesion between the base film and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, in other words, the anchoring property of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer to the base film.
  • the back surface of the substrate film may be subjected to release treatment as necessary.
  • the release treatment for example, a general silicone-based, long-chain alkyl-based, fluorine-based, etc.
  • release agent is typically applied to a thin film of about 0.01 ⁇ m to 1 ⁇ m (eg, 0.01 ⁇ m to 0.1 ⁇ m). It can be a treatment to give. By performing such a peeling treatment, it is possible to obtain effects such as facilitating the unwinding of the adhesive sheet wound into a roll.
  • a release liner can be used in the formation of the adhesive layer, the production of the adhesive sheet, the production of the laminate, the storage of the laminate before use, distribution, shape processing, and the like.
  • the release liner is not particularly limited.
  • a release liner having a release treatment layer on the surface of a liner substrate such as a resin film or paper, a fluoropolymer (such as polytetrafluoroethylene), or a polyolefin resin (PE,
  • a release liner or the like made of a low-adhesive material such as PP can be used.
  • the release treatment layer may be formed by surface-treating the liner base material with a release treatment agent such as a silicone-based, long-chain alkyl-based, fluorine-based, or molybdenum sulfide release agent.
  • the laminate disclosed herein preferably has step followability at a pass level in a step waterproof test measured by the method described in Examples below.
  • a laminate that satisfies the above characteristics tends to maintain a state in which it follows a complicated shape without gaps.
  • the laminate disclosed herein preferably has an acceptable level of strain resistance (that is, does not cause strain) in a strain deformation test measured by the method described in Examples below.
  • a laminate that satisfies the above characteristics has excellent deformation resistance against a load applied substantially in the thickness direction (Z-axis direction) of the laminate, and suppresses the occurrence of distortion in the adherend. It's easy to do.
  • the total thickness T total of the laminate (not including the release liner) disclosed herein is not particularly limited.
  • the total thickness T total of the laminate can be, for example, 1000 ⁇ m or less, and from the viewpoint of thinning, the total thickness T total of the laminate is preferably 500 ⁇ m or less (eg, 400 ⁇ m or less), more preferably 350 ⁇ m or less. and more preferably 300 ⁇ m or less. According to the technology disclosed herein, even if the total thickness T total of the laminate is sufficiently small, it tends to exhibit good strain resistance.
  • the lower limit of the total thickness T total of the laminate is not particularly limited, but is usually 20 ⁇ m or more, preferably 30 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 40 ⁇ m or more, still more preferably 50 ⁇ m or more, and even 60 ⁇ m or more. Well, it may be 70 ⁇ m or more, or it may be 80 ⁇ m or more.
  • the light transmittance C total of the laminate is not particularly limited.
  • the light transmittance C total of the laminate is preferably 20% or less, more preferably 10% or less, from the viewpoint of imparting design properties and improving the light-shielding property of the laminate. , more preferably 5% or less, particularly preferably 1.5% or less.
  • the lower limit of the light transmittance C total is not particularly limited, and may be substantially 0%, that is, the detection limit or less, 1% or more, 5% or more, or 15% or more.
  • the light transmittance C total of the laminate can be measured by the following method. Also in the examples described later, it is measured by the following method.
  • the light transmittance C total [%] of the laminate is the light transmittance in the thickness direction of the laminate peeled off from the release liner (light transmittance at a wavelength of 550 nm). is measured using a transmissometer.
  • a spectrophotometer manufactured by Hitachi apparatus name “U4150 type spectrophotometer” or an equivalent thereof is used.
  • the laminate disclosed herein has excellent conformability to complicated shapes and resistance to distortion. Taking advantage of such characteristics, the laminate can be used in various applications requiring deformation resistance and strain resistance. For example, it is suitable for fixing members of various portable electronic devices having members having a bent shape. In addition, since portable electronic devices may be subjected to external impacts and loads, the use of the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet disclosed herein is highly advantageous in suppressing the occurrence of distortion of adherends.
  • Non-limiting examples of the above portable electronic devices include mobile phones, smartphones, tablet computers, notebook computers, various wearable devices (for example, wrist wear type worn on the wrist like a wristwatch, Eyewear type including glasses type (monocular type and binocular type, including head-mounted type), clothes type attached to shirts, socks, hats, etc. in the form of accessories, earphones ear-wear type, etc.), digital cameras, digital video cameras, audio equipment (portable music players, IC recorders, etc.), calculators (calculators, etc.), portable game devices, electronic dictionaries, electronic notebooks, electronic books, vehicle-mounted information equipment, portable radios, portable televisions, portable printers, portable scanners, portable modems, etc.
  • the term “portable” means not only being able to be simply carried, but also having a level of portability that allows an individual (a typical adult) to carry it relatively easily. shall mean.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet disclosed herein is preferably used for fixing a member such as a cover glass having a three-dimensional shape (typically a curved surface shape) constituting the portable electronic device. . It is also suitable for fixing the surface of an adherend having steps. Since the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet disclosed herein is excellent in followability to an adherend, it can adhere well to the above three-dimensional shape and complicated shape having steps. While exhibiting a good fixing function by closely adhering to the surface of the adherend having such a three-dimensional shape and steps, for example, it is suitable for products that require waterproofness (for example, electronic devices such as portable electronic devices). It can provide excellent waterproofness.
  • the laminate disclosed herein is preferably used in mobile electronic devices for fixing members such as flexible printed wiring boards constituting the mobile electronic devices. Since the laminate disclosed herein has excellent conformability to a complicated shape, it can be reliably adhered to an adherend having a bent shape such as the flexible printed wiring board. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of distortion in the electronic components fixed to the flexible printed wiring board or the like.
  • the laminate disclosed here can be used in the form of bonding materials processed into various external shapes to fix members constituting the portable electronic device as described above.
  • it can be preferably used for electronic equipment (typically portable electronic equipment) equipped with an organic EL display device or a liquid crystal display device.
  • an electronic device having a display part such as a touch panel display (typically a mobile electronic device such as a smartphone), and the adhesive sheet disclosed herein is used for fixing members of the device having a large-screen display part. is preferably used.
  • the laminate disclosed herein may be used to fix a member such as a cover member or an organic EL unit.
  • the laminate disclosed herein is preferably used as a component of the display device as described above.
  • Matters disclosed by this specification include the following. [1] a core body; a first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet containing a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disposed on one surface of the core; and a second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet containing a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disposed on the other surface of the core, wherein
  • the product (E A ⁇ T A ) of Young's modulus E A [MPa] and thickness T A [ ⁇ m] of the core is 500000 or more
  • the thickness T B of one or both of the first adhesive sheet and the second adhesive sheet is greater than 10 ⁇ m
  • the storage elastic modulus G′ at 25° C. (25° C.) is less than 0.20 MPa. laminate.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer contained in one or both of the first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive layer containing an acrylic polymer as a base polymer, the above [1] to [ 3] The pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet according to any one of the above items.
  • the Young's modulus E A of the core is 3000 MPa or more.
  • terpene phenol resin B as a tackifying resin, 3 parts of an isocyanate cross-linking agent and 0.01 part of an epoxy cross-linking agent are added to 100 parts of the acrylic polymer E contained in the solution. was added and mixed with stirring to prepare a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition E.
  • terpene phenol resin B tackifier resin B
  • trade name "YS Polystar T-115" manufactured by Yasuhara Chemical Co., Ltd., softening point of about 115°C, hydroxyl value of 30 to 60 mgKOH/g
  • terpene phenol resin B tackifier resin B
  • trade name "YS Polystar T-115" manufactured by Yasuhara Chemical Co., Ltd., softening point of about 115°C, hydroxyl value of 30 to 60 mgKOH/g
  • terpene phenol resin A as tackifier resin A, 2 parts of isocyanate cross-linking agent and 0.01 of epoxy cross-linking agent are added to 100 parts of acrylic polymer A contained in the solution. and mixed with stirring to prepare a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition A.
  • terpene phenol resin A the trade name "YS Polystar S-145" (manufactured by Yasuhara Chemical Co., Ltd., softening point of about 145° C., hydroxyl value of 70 to 110 mgKOH/g) was used.
  • isocyanate-based cross-linking agent trade name "Coronate L” (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, 75% ethyl acetate solution of trimethylolpropane/tolylene diisocyanate trimer adduct) was used.
  • epoxy-based cross-linking agent trade name "TETRAD-C” (manufactured by Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Co., Ltd., 1,3-bis(N,N-diglycidylaminomethyl)cyclohexane) was used.
  • the isocyanate-based cross-linking agent and the epoxy-based cross-linking agent were the same as those described above when preparing other pressure-sensitive adhesive compositions below.
  • Table 1 summarizes the composition of the adhesive compositions E, E black , F, G, H and A and the weight average molecular weight of the base polymer.
  • Adhesive composition E was applied to the release surface of a 38 ⁇ m thick polyester release liner (trade name “Diafoil MRF”, manufactured by Mitsubishi Polyester Co., Ltd.) and dried at 100° C. for 2 minutes to form a 15 ⁇ m thick adhesive. formed a layer.
  • a substrate-less double-sided PSA sheet having a thickness of 15 ⁇ m, one side of which was protected by the polyester release liner, was obtained.
  • Two sheets of the substrate-less double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet were prepared and used as the first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet of this example.
  • the adhesive surface of the first adhesive sheet was attached to one surface of a stainless steel sheet (SUS 304BA) having a thickness of 20 ⁇ m as a core. Also, the adhesive surface of the second adhesive sheet was attached to the other surface of the stainless steel sheet (SUS 304BA). In this manner, the first and second adhesive sheets are arranged on both sides of the core, and the two release liners protect the adhesive surface of the first adhesive sheet and the adhesive surface of the second adhesive sheet. A laminated body was produced, and this was used as the laminated body of this example.
  • Example 2 to 4 In the same manner as in Example 1, except that the thickness of the first adhesive sheet (adhesive layer), the thickness of the second adhesive sheet (adhesive layer) and/or the core body are as shown in Table 1. , to obtain the laminate of this example.
  • Example 5 Two sheets of a 38 ⁇ m thick polyester release liner (trade name “Diafoil MRF”, manufactured by Mitsubishi Polyester Co., Ltd.) were prepared.
  • the adhesive composition E was applied to the release surface of each release liner and dried at 100° C. for 2 minutes to form an adhesive layer having a thickness of 10 ⁇ m.
  • a multi-layer structure support with a total thickness of about 10 ⁇ m consisting of a 5 ⁇ m thick transparent PET film (trade name “Lumirror”, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.) and a black printed layer provided on one side of the PET film.
  • a substrate was prepared.
  • the black printed layer was formed by printing using an ink composition containing a black colorant and using a gravure printing method.
  • a thick film having an adhesive layer on the first surface and the second surface of the black printed PET film is obtained.
  • a double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate having a thickness of 30 ⁇ m was produced. Two sheets of the double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with the base material were prepared and used as the first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet of this example.
  • a laminate of this example was produced using the same method as in Example 1, except that the first and second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets of this example were used.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer formed on each release liner has a thickness of 45 ⁇ m, and a 50 ⁇ m-thick PET film (trade name “Lumirror”, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.) kneaded with a black pigment is used as a support base material.
  • a 140 ⁇ m-thick double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate was produced in the same manner as in Example 5 except that the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets were the first and second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets of this example.
  • a laminate of this example was produced using the same method as in Example 1, except that the first and second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets of this example were used.
  • Example 7 A substrate-less double-sided PSA sheet with a thickness of 20 ⁇ m was produced using the same method as in Example 1, except that the thickness of the PSA layer was 20 ⁇ m, and used as the first PSA sheet of this example.
  • Example 5 except that the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer formed on each release liner had a thickness of 50 ⁇ m, and a transparent PET film having a thickness of 160 ⁇ m (trade name “Lumirror”, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.) was used as the supporting substrate.
  • a double-faced PSA sheet with a substrate having a thickness of 260 ⁇ m was prepared in the same manner as in , and used as the second PSA sheet of this example.
  • a laminate of this example was produced using the same method as in Example 1, except that the first and second adhesive sheets of this example were used.
  • Example 8> A substrate-less double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a thickness of 20 ⁇ m was prepared using the same method as the first and second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets of Example 1, except that the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer was 20 ⁇ m. 1 adhesive sheet.
  • Example 8 Except that the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer formed on each release liner was 12.5 ⁇ m, and a transparent PET film (trade name “Lumirror”, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.) with a thickness of 235 ⁇ m was used as the supporting substrate. In the same manner as in Example 5, a double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate having a thickness of 260 ⁇ m was produced as the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet of Example 8.
  • a laminate of this example was produced using the same method as in Example 1, except that the first and second adhesive sheets of this example were used.
  • Example 9 A laminate of this example was produced in the same manner as in Example 1, except that an aluminum sheet with a thickness of 20 ⁇ m (trade name “A1N30H-O”, manufactured by Takeuchi Metal Foil & Powder Co., Ltd.) was used as the core. bottom.
  • an aluminum sheet with a thickness of 20 ⁇ m (trade name “A1N30H-O”, manufactured by Takeuchi Metal Foil & Powder Co., Ltd.) was used as the core. bottom.
  • Example 10 A laminate of this example was produced in the same manner as in Example 1, except that a 20 ⁇ m thick copper sheet (trade name “C1020R-H”, manufactured by Takeuchi Metal Foil & Powder Co., Ltd.) was used as the core. bottom.
  • a 20 ⁇ m thick copper sheet (trade name “C1020R-H”, manufactured by Takeuchi Metal Foil & Powder Co., Ltd.) was used as the core. bottom.
  • Example 11 A laminate of this example was produced in the same manner as in Example 1, except that a 125 ⁇ m thick transparent PET film (trade name “Lumirror”, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.) was used as the core.
  • a 125 ⁇ m thick transparent PET film trade name “Lumirror”, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.
  • Example 12 A substrate-less double-sided PSA sheet with a thickness of 15 ⁇ m was produced in the same manner as in Example 1, except that PSA composition E black was used instead of PSA composition E. 1 and 2 pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets.
  • a laminate of this example was produced using the same method as in Example 11, except that the first and second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets of this example were used.
  • Example 13> A 30 ⁇ m-thick substrate-less double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet was produced in the same manner as in Example 2, except that the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition F was used instead of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition E. and a second adhesive sheet.
  • a laminate of this example was produced using the same method as in Example 1, except that the first and second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets of this example were used.
  • Example 14> A 30 ⁇ m-thick substrate-less double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet was produced in the same manner as in Example 2, except that the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition G was used instead of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition E. and a second adhesive sheet.
  • a laminate of this example was produced using the same method as in Example 1, except that the first and second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets of this example were used.
  • Example 15 A 30 ⁇ m-thick substrate-less double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet was produced in the same manner as in Example 2, except that the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition H was used instead of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition E. and a second adhesive sheet.
  • a laminate of this example was produced using the same method as in Example 1, except that the first and second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets of this example were used.
  • Example 16> A 10 ⁇ m-thick substrate-less double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet was produced in the same manner as in Example 1, except that the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer was 10 ⁇ m. and A laminate of this example was produced using the same method as in Example 1, except that the first and second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets of this example were used.
  • Example 17 A laminate of this example was produced in the same manner as in Example 1, except that a 100 ⁇ m thick transparent PET film (trade name “Lumirror”, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.) was used as the core.
  • a 100 ⁇ m thick transparent PET film trade name “Lumirror”, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.
  • Example 18 A substrate with a thickness of 35 ⁇ m was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the adhesive composition A was used instead of the adhesive composition E and the thickness of the adhesive layer was 35 ⁇ m. A less double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet was prepared and used as the first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet of this example. In addition, the same method as in Example 1 was used except that the adhesive composition F was used instead of the adhesive composition A and the thickness of the adhesive layer was 25 ⁇ m. A substrate-less double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet was produced and used as the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet of this example. Using the same method as in Example 1, except that the first and second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets of this example were used and a stainless steel sheet (SUS 304BA) having a thickness of 40 ⁇ m was used as the core body, this Example laminates were produced.
  • SUS 304BA stainless steel sheet having a thickness of 40 ⁇ m
  • Tables 2 and 3 show the outline of the laminate of each example; light transmittance CB of the adhesive sheet of each example; light transmittance C total of the laminate; Young's modulus EA [MPa] of the core, thickness TA [ ⁇ ]m and E A ⁇ T A ; the total thickness T total of the laminate are described.
  • a polycarbonate plate having a size larger than that of the acrylic plate was prepared, and a level difference tape (width 5 mm, height 20 ⁇ m) was attached to the surface of this polycarbonate plate.
  • This level difference tape is used for the purpose of providing projections (level differences) on the surface of the polycarbonate plate.
  • an adhesive sheet having an adhesive layer on one side of a PET substrate was used as the stepped tape.
  • the acrylic plate with the window-frame-shaped laminate prepared above was placed on two parallel sides of the window-frame-shaped laminate in such a position that the first adhesive sheet side of the laminate faces the polycarbonate side.
  • the central portion of the window frame-like laminate crosses the stepped tape (so that the two parallel sides of the window frame laminate intersect (perpendicularly) with the stepped tape), and crimped under the conditions of 0.2 MPa and 1 minute.
  • a sample for evaluation was thus obtained.
  • the window-frame-shaped laminate is adhered to the adherend (acrylic plate, polycarbonate plate, and stepped tape)
  • the inside becomes a space sealed from the outside.
  • step waterproofing is carried out by immersing the evaluation sample in water in the autoclave, pressurizing at 25 ° C. and 0.5 MPa for 30 minutes in the autoclave, and the inside of the evaluation sample (window frame-like laminate The presence or absence of water intrusion into the inside of the body) was visually observed.
  • step followability The presence or absence of water infiltration into the evaluation sample was evaluated as step followability. When water infiltration into the evaluation sample was observed, it was judged as "P: Poor", and when it was not observed, it was judged as "G: Good”. The evaluation results are shown in Tables 2 and 3 in the step followability item.
  • the step waterproof test was performed after aging the evaluation sample for 30 minutes under standard conditions (23° C., 50% RH).
  • a PET film 80 having a length of 50 mm, a width of 50 mm, and a thickness of 125 ⁇ m and a stepped tape 82 having a width of 2 mm, a length of 50 mm, and a height of 8 mm are prepared.
  • the stepped tape 82 was attached to the central portion so that the length direction of the PET film 80 was aligned with the direction of one side of the PET film 80 .
  • the stepped tape 82 is used for the purpose of forming projections (steps) on the surface of the PET film 80 .
  • the level difference tape 82 an adhesive sheet having an adhesive layer on one side of a PET base material was used.
  • the laminate according to each example in which both adhesive surfaces were protected with a release liner was cut into a size of 10 mm in length and 10 mm in width, and two release liners were peeled off from the laminate, and each adhesive surface was exposed to a thickness.
  • a 5 ⁇ m PET film was adhered and backed to obtain a laminate sample piece 84 .
  • a commercially available silicone rubber sheet 86 having a length of 50 mm, a width of 50 mm and a thickness of 3 mm was prepared.
  • a laminate sample piece 84 was placed in the center of the upper surface of a silicon rubber sheet 86 so that the direction of one side of the laminate sample piece 84 and the direction of one side of the silicon rubber sheet 86 were aligned.
  • the PET film 80 was placed above the silicon rubber sheet 86 with the stepped tape 82 facing downward. At this time, the PET film 80 was arranged at a position overlapping the silicon rubber sheet 86 when viewed from above. Then, as shown in FIG. 4B, a load of 40 N was applied from above the PET film 80 toward the silicon rubber sheet 86 for 10 seconds under an environment of 25° C. and 50% RH. After that, as shown in FIG. 4C, the PET film 80 was pulled upward, and the silicon rubber sheet 86 from which the laminate sample piece 84 was removed was left for 24 hours in an environment of 25° C. and 50% RH.
  • the strain height of the silicon rubber sheet 86 was measured using a surface shape measuring device (model number "Wyko NT9100", manufactured by Veeco), and the strain height was evaluated as the strain resistance of the laminate.
  • a surface shape measuring device model number "Wyko NT9100", manufactured by Veeco
  • the value (ab) obtained by subtracting is taken as the strain height c.
  • the strain height c was 3 ⁇ m or less, it was determined as “G: Good”, and when the strain height c was greater than 3 ⁇ m, it was determined as “P: Poor”.
  • the evaluation results are shown in Tables 2 and 3 in the item of strain resistance.
  • the laminates of Examples 1 to 15, 17 and 18, in which the thickness T B of the first and second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets are all larger than 10 ⁇ m have the thickness T B of the first and second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets Compared to the laminate of Example 16, which has a thickness of 10 ⁇ m, it exhibited remarkably excellent step followability.
  • the laminates of Examples 1 to 17, in which the storage elastic modulus G' (25°C) at 25°C of the first and second adhesive sheets is less than 0.20 MPa, are the storage elastic moduli of the first and second adhesive sheets.
  • first adhesive sheet 12 second adhesive sheet 15 core 21 release liners 25, 35 substrates 32, 34, 36, 38 adhesive layer 50 PC board 60
  • PET film 82 step tape 84 laminate sample piece 86 silicon rubber sheet

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Laminated Bodies (AREA)
  • Adhesive Tapes (AREA)
  • Adhesives Or Adhesive Processes (AREA)

Abstract

Provided is a laminate that is capable of satisfying both ability to follow complicated profiles and ability to tolerate strain. Provided is a laminate comprising: a core body; a first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet that contains a pressure-sensitive adhesive agent layer and is disposed on one surface of the core body; and a second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet that contains a pressure-sensitive adhesive agent layer and is disposed on other surface of the core body. The product (EA×TA) between the Young's modulus EA [MPa] of the core body and the thickness TA [μm] thereof is 500,000 or more. The first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and/or the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet has a thickness TB of greater than 10 μm and a storage elastic modulus G' (25°C) of less than 0.20 MPa at 25°C.

Description

積層体laminate
 本発明は、芯体と該芯体の各表面に配置された粘着シートとを含む積層体に関する。本出願は、2021年8月27日に出願された日本国特許出願2021-139359号に基づく優先権を主張しており、その出願の全内容は本明細書中に参照として組み入れられている。 The present invention relates to a laminate including a core and adhesive sheets arranged on each surface of the core. This application claims priority based on Japanese Patent Application No. 2021-139359 filed on August 27, 2021, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
 一般に粘着剤(感圧接着剤ともいう。以下同じ。)は、室温付近の温度域において柔らかい固体(粘弾性体)の状態を呈し、圧力により簡単に被着体に接着する性質を有する。かかる性質を活かして、粘着剤は、作業性がよく接着信頼性の高い接合手段として、家電製品から自動車、OA機器等の各種産業分野において広く利用されている。例えば、粘着剤は、スマートフォンその他の携帯電子機器内における部材の接合や固定、保護等の目的でも広く利用されている。携帯電子機器の部材固定に用いられる粘着テープに関する技術文献として特許文献1~2が挙げられる。 In general, pressure-sensitive adhesives (also called pressure-sensitive adhesives; the same shall apply hereinafter) exhibit a soft solid (viscoelastic) state in a temperature range near room temperature, and have the property of easily adhering to adherends under pressure. Taking advantage of such properties, pressure-sensitive adhesives are widely used in various industrial fields such as home electric appliances, automobiles, and OA equipment as bonding means with good workability and high adhesion reliability. For example, pressure-sensitive adhesives are widely used for purposes such as joining, fixing, and protecting members in smartphones and other mobile electronic devices. Patent Documents 1 and 2 are cited as technical documents relating to adhesive tapes used for fixing members of portable electronic devices.
日本国特許出願公開2019-70102号公報Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2019-70102 日本国特許出願公開2018-28051号公報Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-28051
 近年、小型化、薄層化に加えて、3次元形状等の曲面形状を有する携帯電子機器製品の開発が進んでおり、その構成部材の形状は複雑化の傾向にある。上記複雑な形状に貼り付けられる粘着剤には、その形状によく追従し、密着する性能が求められる。例えば、上記携帯電子機器において、複雑な表面形状(曲面形状であり得る。)を有する部材を固定する粘着剤は、複雑な形状に隙間なく追従した状態を維持しつつ、良好な固定機能を発揮する必要がある。被着体の曲面形状に追従密着せず、被着体との間に隙間が生じると、その隙間から水が入って防水性が損なわれるなどの不具合が発生するおそれがある。 In recent years, in addition to miniaturization and thinning, the development of mobile electronic equipment products with curved surfaces such as three-dimensional shapes is progressing, and the shapes of their constituent members tend to be complicated. The pressure-sensitive adhesive that is applied to the above-mentioned complicated shape is required to have the ability to follow the shape well and adhere to it. For example, in the portable electronic device, the adhesive for fixing a member having a complicated surface shape (which may be a curved surface shape) exhibits a good fixing function while maintaining a state in which the complicated shape is followed without gaps. There is a need to. If the adhesive does not adhere to the curved surface of the adherend and a gap is formed between the adherend and the adherend, water may enter through the gap and water resistance may be impaired.
 また、粘着剤には被着体を保護する性能が求められる。特に、携帯電子機器は、その携帯性から外部より衝撃や荷重が付与されやすい傾向にあるため、携帯電子機器に用いられる粘着剤には、衝撃等によって他の部材(被着体や、被着体の背面側に配置される部材等)に変形(歪み)が生じることを抑制する性能が求められる。被着体の保護性に劣る粘着剤によると、例えば被着体が、電子部品が固定されたフレキシブルプリント配線板である場合に、該電子部品が外部からの衝撃等によって変形して破損するなどの不具合が発生するおそれがある。したがって、粘着剤には、衝撃等によって他の部材に変形(歪み)が生じることを抑制する性能(以下、このような性能のことを「耐歪み性」という。)が求められる。 In addition, the adhesive is required to have the ability to protect the adherend. In particular, mobile electronic devices tend to be easily subjected to impacts and loads from the outside due to their portability. The performance of suppressing deformation (distortion) of a member, etc., placed on the back side of the body is required. For example, if the adherend is a flexible printed wiring board to which an electronic component is fixed, the electronic component may be deformed and damaged by an external impact or the like, if the adhesive is poor in protecting the adherend. malfunction may occur. Therefore, the pressure-sensitive adhesive is required to have the performance of suppressing deformation (distortion) of other members due to impact or the like (such performance is hereinafter referred to as "distortion resistance").
 従来の粘着剤の構成によって、複雑な形状への追従性と被着体の保護性とを両立して向上させることは容易ではない。本発明は、上記の事情に鑑みて創出されたものであり、複雑な形状への追従性と耐歪み性とを両立しうる構造体(積層体)を提供することを目的とする。 It is not easy to improve both the conformability to complex shapes and the protection of the adherend with the structure of conventional adhesives. The present invention has been created in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a structure (laminated body) capable of achieving both conformability to a complicated shape and resistance to distortion.
 一の粘着剤層のみでシート状に構成される粘着シートのように、単一要素で構成される構造によると、互いに異なる2以上の性能を高いレベルで両立させることは困難になりがちである。発明者らは、少なくとも粘着剤層を含む2以上の構成要素が積層して構成される積層体を採用することにより、複雑な形状への追従性と上記耐歪み性とを両立して向上させ得ることを見出した。 With a structure composed of a single element, such as a sheet-shaped pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with only one pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, it tends to be difficult to combine two or more different properties at a high level. . The inventors adopted a laminate composed of two or more constituent elements laminated at least including an adhesive layer, thereby improving both the followability to a complicated shape and the above-mentioned strain resistance. found to get.
 この明細書によると、芯体と、該芯体の一方の表面に配置された第1の粘着シートと、該芯体の他方の表面に配置された第2の粘着シートと、を備える積層体が提供される。ここで、第1の粘着シートおよび第2の粘着シートはそれぞれ粘着剤層を含む。この積層体において、上記芯体のヤング率E[MPa]と厚さT[μm]の積(E×T)は500000以上である。かかる芯体を用いることにより、たとえ厚さTが比較的薄い積層体であっても、優れた耐歪み性が達成されやすくなる。また、上記第1の粘着シートおよび上記第2の粘着シートの一方または両方は、厚さTが10μmより大きく、かつ、25℃における貯蔵弾性率G′(25℃)が0.20MPa未満である。このような粘着シートを、特に上記の厚さTおよび貯蔵弾性率G′(25℃)を有する粘着シート側を複雑な形状(例えば段差)を有する被着体に貼り付ける態様で使用された場合に、積層体の複雑な形状(例えば段差)への追従性が向上する傾向にある。したがって、上記ヤング率E[MPa]と厚さT[μm]の積(E×T)が500000以上である芯体と、厚さTが10μmより大きく貯蔵弾性率G′(25℃)が0.20MPa未満である粘着シートとを含む構成の積層体によると、複雑な形状への追従性と耐歪み性とが両立して達成され得る。 According to this specification, a laminate comprising a core, a first adhesive sheet arranged on one surface of the core, and a second adhesive sheet arranged on the other surface of the core is provided. Here, the first adhesive sheet and the second adhesive sheet each include an adhesive layer. In this laminate, the product (E A ×T A ) of Young's modulus E A [MPa] and thickness T A [μm] of the core is 500,000 or more. By using such a core, even if the laminate has a relatively thin thickness TA , excellent strain resistance is likely to be achieved. In addition, one or both of the first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet have a thickness T B of more than 10 μm and a storage elastic modulus G′ at 25° C. (25° C.) of less than 0.20 MPa. be. Such a pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet was used in a manner in which the side of the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet having the above thickness T B and storage elastic modulus G′ (25° C.) is attached to an adherend having a complicated shape (e.g., steps). In this case, there is a tendency that followability to a complicated shape (for example, steps) of the laminate is improved. Therefore, the product of the Young's modulus E A [MPa] and the thickness T A [μm] (E A ×T A ) is 500000 or more, and the storage elastic modulus G′ ( 25° C.) is less than 0.20 MPa, it is possible to achieve both conformability to complex shapes and distortion resistance.
 いくつかの好ましい態様において、上記第1の粘着シートおよび上記第2の粘着シートの一方または両方は、25℃における貯蔵弾性率G′(85℃)が0.05MPa未満である。かかる粘着シートを用いることにより、積層体の複雑な形状への追従性が向上する傾向にある。 In some preferred embodiments, one or both of the first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet have a storage elastic modulus G' at 25°C (85°C) of less than 0.05 MPa. By using such a pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet, there is a tendency that the conformability to a complicated shape of the laminate is improved.
 いくつかの好ましい態様において、上記第1の粘着シートおよび上記第2の粘着シートの一方または両方は、120℃における貯蔵弾性率G′(120℃)が0.03MPa未満である。かかる粘着シートを用いることにより、積層体の複雑な形状への追従性が向上する傾向にある。 In some preferred embodiments, one or both of the first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet have a storage elastic modulus G' at 120°C (120°C) of less than 0.03 MPa. By using such a pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet, there is a tendency that the conformability to a complicated shape of the laminate is improved.
 いくつかの好ましい態様において、上記芯体の厚さTは、10μm以上300μm以下である。かかる構成によると、積層体の薄膜化と優れた耐歪み性が達成されやすくなる。 In some preferred embodiments, the thickness TA of the core is 10 μm or more and 300 μm or less. According to such a configuration, it becomes easier to achieve thinning of the laminate and excellent strain resistance.
 いくつかの好ましい態様において、上記芯体のヤング率Eは、3000MPa以上である。かかる構成によると、積層体の薄膜化と優れた耐歪み性が達成されやすくなる。 In some preferred embodiments, the Young's modulus EA of the core is 3000 MPa or higher. According to such a configuration, it becomes easier to achieve thinning of the laminate and excellent strain resistance.
 いくつかの好ましい態様において、積層体の光透過率Ctotalは10%以下である。かかる積層体は、バックライトモジュール等の光源を含む製品に用いられて、該光源からの光漏れの抑制(遮光性)や、意匠性付与に優れる傾向にある。 In some preferred embodiments, the laminate has a light transmittance C total of 10% or less. Such a laminate is used in products including a light source such as a backlight module, and tends to be excellent in suppressing light leakage from the light source (light shielding property) and imparting design properties.
 いくつかの好ましい態様において、積層体の総厚さTtotalは50μm以上400μm以下である。かかる積層体は、複雑な形状への追従性に優れる傾向にある。 In some preferred embodiments, the laminate has a total thickness T total of 50 μm or more and 400 μm or less. Such laminates tend to have excellent conformability to complex shapes.
 ここに開示される積層体は、電子機器に好ましく用いられ得る。特に、ここに開示される積層体は、複雑な形状への追従性および耐歪み性に優れるというという特長を活かして、複雑な形状を有する部材を含んだり、外部からの衝撃や荷重負荷が生じたりしやすい、携帯電子機器に好ましく用いられる。ここに開示される積層体は、厚さが制限されているので、この観点からも、薄膜化や軽量化が進行している携帯電子機器に好ましく用いられる。 The laminate disclosed here can be preferably used for electronic equipment. In particular, the laminate disclosed herein utilizes the features of being excellent in conformability to complex shapes and in distortion resistance, and includes members having complex shapes, and is subject to impact and load from the outside. It is preferably used for portable electronic devices that are easy to wear. Since the laminate disclosed herein has a limited thickness, from this point of view as well, it is preferably used in portable electronic devices that are becoming thinner and lighter.
 なお、本明細書に記載された各要素を適宜組み合わせたものも、本件特許出願によって特許による保護を求める発明の範囲に含まれ得る。 Any appropriate combination of the elements described in this specification may also be included in the scope of the invention for which patent protection is sought by this patent application.
一実施形態に係る積層体の構成を示す模式的断面図である。1 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing the configuration of a laminate according to one embodiment; FIG. 他の実施形態に係る積層体の構成を示す模式的断面図である。FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing the configuration of a laminate according to another embodiment; 他の実施形態に係る積層体の構成を示す模式的断面図である。FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing the configuration of a laminate according to another embodiment; 耐歪み性試験の方法を説明した模式図である。It is a schematic diagram explaining the method of a strain resistance test.
 以下、本発明の好適な実施形態を説明する。なお、本明細書において特に言及している事項以外の事柄であって本発明の実施に必要な事柄は、本明細書に記載された発明の実施についての教示と出願時の技術常識とに基づいて当業者に理解され得る。本発明は、本明細書に開示されている内容と当該分野における技術常識とに基づいて実施することができる。また、以下の図面において、同じ作用を奏する部材・部位には同じ符号を付して説明することがあり、重複する説明は省略または簡略化することがある。また、図面に記載の実施形態は、本発明を明瞭に説明するために模式化されており、製品として実際に提供される本発明の積層体または粘着シートのサイズや縮尺を必ずしも正確に表したものではない。 A preferred embodiment of the present invention will be described below. Matters other than the matters specifically mentioned in the present specification, which are necessary for the implementation of the present invention, are based on the teaching of the implementation of the invention described in the present specification and the common general knowledge at the time of filing. can be understood by those skilled in the art. The present invention can be implemented based on the contents disclosed in this specification and common general technical knowledge in the field. Further, in the following drawings, members and portions having the same function may be denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant description may be omitted or simplified. In addition, the embodiments described in the drawings are schematic for clearly explaining the present invention, and do not necessarily accurately represent the size and scale of the laminate or pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet of the present invention that is actually provided as a product. not a thing
 本明細書において「粘着剤」とは、前述のように、室温付近の温度域において柔らかい固体(粘弾性体)の状態を呈し、圧力により簡単に被着体に接着する性質を有する材料をいう。ここでいう粘着剤は、「C. A. Dahlquist, “Adhesion : Fundamentals and Practice”, McLaren & Sons, (1966) P. 143」に定義されているとおり、一般的に、複素引張弾性率E(1Hz)<10dyne/cmを満たす性質を有する材料(典型的には、25℃において上記性質を有する材料)であり得る。 As used herein, the term “adhesive” refers to a material that exhibits a soft solid (viscoelastic) state in a temperature range around room temperature and has the property of easily adhering to an adherend under pressure, as described above. . The adhesive as used herein generally has a complex tensile modulus E * (1 Hz), as defined in "C. A. Dahlquist, "Adhesion: Fundamentals and Practice", McLaren & Sons, (1966) P. 143". It may be a material having properties satisfying <10 7 dyne/cm 2 (typically, a material having the above properties at 25°C).
 <積層体の構成例>
 ここに開示される積層体は、非剥離性の芯体と、該芯体の一方の表面に配置された第1の粘着シートと、該芯体の他方の表面に配置された第2の粘着シートを含む。ここで、第1の粘着シートは粘着剤層を含む粘着シートであり、第2の粘着シートもまた粘着剤層を含む粘着シートである。上記第1の粘着シートは、非剥離性の基材(支持基材)の両面に粘着剤層を有する形態の基材付き粘着シートであってもよく、非剥離性の基材を有しない基材レス粘着シートであってもよい。また、上記第2の粘着シートは、非剥離性の基材(支持基材)の両面に粘着剤層を有する形態の基材付き粘着シートであってもよく、非剥離性の基材を有しない基材レス粘着シートであってもよい。
<Structure Example of Laminate>
The laminate disclosed herein includes a non-releasable core, a first adhesive sheet disposed on one surface of the core, and a second adhesive sheet disposed on the other surface of the core. Including sheet. Here, the first adhesive sheet is an adhesive sheet containing an adhesive layer, and the second adhesive sheet is also an adhesive sheet containing an adhesive layer. The first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet may be a pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate in the form of having pressure-sensitive adhesive layers on both sides of a non-releasable substrate (supporting substrate). It may be a material-less pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet. Further, the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet may be a pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate having a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on both sides of a non-releasable substrate (supporting substrate), and has a non-releasable substrate. It may be a substrate-less pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet.
 ここでいう積層体の概念には、基材付き粘着シートと称されるものが包含され得る。またここでいう積層体の概念には、粘着シート、粘着テープ、粘着ラベル、粘着フィルム等と称されるものが包含され得る。ここに開示される積層体は、典型的にはシート状であり、ロール状であってもよく、枚葉状であってもよい。あるいは、さらに種々の形状に加工された形態の積層体であってもよい。 The concept of laminate here can include what is called a pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate. Further, the concept of the laminate as used herein may include what is called an adhesive sheet, adhesive tape, adhesive label, adhesive film, and the like. The laminate disclosed herein is typically in the form of a sheet, may be in the form of a roll, or may be in the form of a sheet. Alternatively, it may be a laminated body processed into various shapes.
 第1の粘着シートおよび第2の粘着シートの両方が、両面粘着タイプの基材レス粘着シート(基材レス両面粘着シート)である場合の積層体の構成例を図1に示す。図1に示す積層体1は、芯体15を含み、芯体15の第一面15Aおよび第二面15B(いずれも非剥離性)に、第1の粘着シート11および第2の粘着シート12がそれぞれ設けられている。ここで、第1の粘着シート11は粘着剤層で構成されている。また、第2の粘着シート12も粘着剤層で構成されている。使用前(被着体への貼り付け前)の積層体1は、図1に示すように、前面21Aおよび背面21Bがいずれも剥離面である剥離ライナー21と重ね合わされて渦巻き状に巻回された形態であり得る。かかる形態の積層体1は、第2の粘着シート12の粘着面12Aが剥離ライナー21の前面21Aにより、第1の粘着シート11の粘着面11Aが剥離ライナー21の背面21Bにより、それぞれ保護されている。あるいは、粘着面11Aおよび粘着面12Aが2枚の独立した剥離ライナーによりそれぞれ保護された形態であってもよい。 FIG. 1 shows a configuration example of a laminate in which both the first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet are double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets without a base material (double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet without a base material). A laminate 1 shown in FIG. are provided respectively. Here, the first adhesive sheet 11 is composed of an adhesive layer. The second adhesive sheet 12 is also composed of an adhesive layer. As shown in FIG. 1, the laminate 1 before use (before being attached to an adherend) is spirally wound with the front surface 21A and the back surface 21B superimposed on the release liner 21, which is a release surface. can be in the form In the laminate 1 having such a configuration, the adhesive surface 12A of the second adhesive sheet 12 is protected by the front surface 21A of the release liner 21, and the adhesive surface 11A of the first adhesive sheet 11 is protected by the back surface 21B of the release liner 21. there is Alternatively, the adhesive surface 11A and the adhesive surface 12A may be protected by two separate release liners.
 第1の粘着シートが両面粘着タイプの基材レス粘着シート(基材レス両面粘着シート)であって、第2の粘着シートが両面粘着タイプの基材付き粘着シート(基材付き両面粘着シート)である場合の積層体の構成例を図2に示す。図2に示す積層体1は、芯体15を含み、芯体15の第一面15Aおよび第二面15B(いずれも非剥離性)に、第1の粘着シート11および第2の粘着シート12がそれぞれ設けられている。第1の粘着シート11は粘着剤層で構成されている。第2の粘着シート12は基材35を含み、基材35の第一面および第二面(いずれも非剥離性)に、それぞれ粘着剤層32、34が設けられている。使用前(被着体への貼り付け前)の積層体1は、図2に示すように、前面21Aおよび背面21Bがいずれも剥離面である剥離ライナー21と重ね合わされて渦巻き状に巻回された形態であり得る。かかる形態の積層体1は、粘着剤層34の表面(粘着面34A)が剥離ライナー21の前面21Aにより、第1の粘着シート11の粘着面11Aが剥離ライナー21の背面21Bにより、それぞれ保護されている。あるいは、粘着面11Aおよび粘着面34Aが2枚の独立した剥離ライナーによりそれぞれ保護された形態であってもよい。 The first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is a double-sided adhesive type substrate-less pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet (base-less double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet), and the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is a double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive type pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate (double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with substrate). FIG. 2 shows a configuration example of the laminate in the case of . The laminate 1 shown in FIG. 2 includes a core 15, and a first adhesive sheet 11 and a second adhesive sheet 12 are attached to the first surface 15A and the second surface 15B (both of which are non-releasable) of the core 15. are provided respectively. The first adhesive sheet 11 is composed of an adhesive layer. The second adhesive sheet 12 includes a substrate 35, and adhesive layers 32 and 34 are provided on the first surface and the second surface (both of which are non-releasable) of the substrate 35, respectively. As shown in FIG. 2, the laminate 1 before use (before being attached to an adherend) is spirally wound with the front surface 21A and the back surface 21B superimposed on the release liner 21, which is a release surface. can be in the form In the laminate 1 having such a configuration, the surface (adhesive surface 34A) of the adhesive layer 34 is protected by the front surface 21A of the release liner 21, and the adhesive surface 11A of the first adhesive sheet 11 is protected by the back surface 21B of the release liner 21. ing. Alternatively, the adhesive surface 11A and the adhesive surface 34A may be protected by two separate release liners.
 第1の粘着シートおよび第2の粘着シートの両方が、両面粘着タイプの基材付き粘着シート(基材付き両面粘着シート)である場合の積層体の構成例を図3に示す。図3に示す積層体1は、芯体15を含み、芯体15の第一面15Aおよび第二面15B(いずれも非剥離性)に、第1の粘着シート11および第2の粘着シート12がそれぞれ設けられている。第1の粘着シート11は、基材25を含み、基材25の第一面および第二面(いずれも非剥離性)にそれぞれ、粘着剤層36、38が設けられている。また、第2の粘着シート12は、基材35を含み、基材35の第一面および第二面(いずれも非剥離性)にそれぞれ、粘着剤層32、34が設けられている。使用前(被着体への貼り付け前)の積層体1は、図3に示すように、前面21Aおよび背面21Bがいずれも剥離面である剥離ライナー21と重ね合わされて渦巻き状に巻回された形態であり得る。かかる形態の積層体1は、粘着剤層34の表面(粘着面34A)が剥離ライナー21の前面21Aにより、粘着剤層36の表面(粘着面36A)が剥離ライナー21の背面21Bにより、それぞれ保護されている。あるいは、粘着面34Aおよび粘着面36Aが2枚の独立した剥離ライナーによりそれぞれ保護された形態であってもよい。 FIG. 3 shows a configuration example of a laminate in which both the first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet are double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets with a substrate (double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate). A laminate 1 shown in FIG. are provided respectively. The first adhesive sheet 11 includes a substrate 25, and adhesive layers 36 and 38 are provided on the first surface and the second surface (both of which are non-releasable) of the substrate 25, respectively. The second adhesive sheet 12 includes a substrate 35, and adhesive layers 32 and 34 are provided on the first surface and the second surface (both of which are non-releasable) of the substrate 35, respectively. As shown in FIG. 3, the laminate 1 before use (before being attached to an adherend) is spirally wound with the front surface 21A and the back surface 21B superimposed on the release liner 21, which is a release surface. can be in the form In the laminate 1 having such a configuration, the surface of the adhesive layer 34 (adhesive surface 34A) is protected by the front surface 21A of the release liner 21, and the surface of the adhesive layer 36 (adhesive surface 36A) is protected by the back surface 21B of the release liner 21. It is Alternatively, the adhesive surface 34A and the adhesive surface 36A may be protected by two separate release liners.
 <芯体>
 ここに開示される芯体は、第1の粘着シートと第2の粘着シートを支持する支持部材である。ここに開示される技術において、上記芯体は、ヤング率と厚さの積が所定値以上であることを特徴とする。具体的には、単位をMPaとするときの芯体のヤング率の値Eと、単位をμmとするときの芯体の厚さの値Tとを掛け合わせて算出される値E×Tが500000以上である。かかる芯体を用いると、積層体の耐歪み性が向上する傾向にある。
<Core body>
The core disclosed here is a support member that supports the first adhesive sheet and the second adhesive sheet. In the technology disclosed herein, the core body is characterized in that the product of Young's modulus and thickness is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. Specifically, the value EA calculated by multiplying the Young's modulus value EA of the core when the unit is MPa and the thickness value TA of the core when the unit is μm. xTA is 500,000 or more. The use of such a core tends to improve the strain resistance of the laminate.
 いくつかの好ましい態様において、E×Tは、70×10以上であり、より好ましくは90×10以上(例えば100×10以上、110×10以上または120×10以上)であり、さらに好ましくは130×10以上である。E×Tの上限は特に限定されない。積層体の薄層化、軽量化等の観点から、1500×10以下であることが好ましく、より好ましくは1000×10以下(例えば800×10以上、600×10以上または500×10以下)であり、さらに好ましくは400×10以下である。 In some preferred embodiments, E A ×T A is 70×10 4 or more, more preferably 90×10 4 or more (eg 100×10 4 or more, 110×10 4 or more or 120×10 4 or more) and more preferably 130×10 4 or more. The upper limit of E A × TA is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of thinning and weight reduction of the laminate, it is preferably 1500×10 4 or less, more preferably 1000×10 4 or less (for example, 800×10 4 or more, 600×10 4 or more, or 500×10 4 or less), more preferably 400×10 4 or less.
 芯体のヤング率Eは、芯体の厚さTとの積が所定値以上となる限りにおいて、特に限定されない。積層体の耐歪み性を向上させる観点からは、芯体のヤング率Eは、3000MPa以上であることが好ましく、より好ましくは5000MPa以上(例えば7000MPa以上、8000MPa以上または9000MPa以上)であり、さらに好ましくは10000MPa以上である。より高いレベルの耐歪み性を実現する観点からは、芯体のヤング率Eは、60000MPa以上であることが好ましく、より好ましくは70000MPa以上(例えば90000MPa以上、100000MPa以上または130000MPa以上)であり、さらに好ましくは150000MPa以上である。芯体のヤング率Eの上限は特に限定されない。加工性や取扱い性の観点から、芯体のヤング率Eは650000MPa以下であることが好ましく、より好ましくは400000MPa以下(例えば300000MPa以下であってもよく、280000MPa以下であってもよく、250000MPa以下であってもよい。 The Young's modulus EA of the core is not particularly limited as long as the product of it and the thickness TA of the core is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. From the viewpoint of improving the strain resistance of the laminate, the Young's modulus EA of the core is preferably 3000 MPa or more, more preferably 5000 MPa or more (for example, 7000 MPa or more, 8000 MPa or more, or 9000 MPa or more). It is preferably 10000 MPa or more. From the viewpoint of achieving a higher level of strain resistance, the Young's modulus EA of the core is preferably 60,000 MPa or more, more preferably 70,000 MPa or more (for example, 90,000 MPa or more, 100,000 MPa or more, or 130,000 MPa or more), More preferably, it is 150000 MPa or more. The upper limit of the Young's modulus EA of the core is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of workability and handleability, the Young's modulus EA of the core is preferably 650000 MPa or less, more preferably 400000 MPa or less (for example, it may be 300000 MPa or less, may be 280000 MPa or less, and may be 250000 MPa or less. may be
 芯体の厚さTは、芯体のヤング率Eとの積が所定値以上となる限りにおいて、特に限定されない。耐歪み性の観点からは、芯体の厚さTは、10μm以上であることが好ましく、より好ましくは12μm以上(例えば15μm以上)であり、さらに好ましくは20μm以上である。芯体の厚さTの上限は特に限定されない。積層体の薄層化、軽量化等の観点から、芯体の厚さTは500μm以下(例えば300μm以下)であることが好ましく、より好ましくは270μm以下であってもよく、250μm以下であってもよく、150μm以下でもよい。 The thickness TA of the core is not particularly limited as long as the product of the thickness TA of the core and the Young's modulus EA of the core is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. From the viewpoint of strain resistance, the thickness TA of the core is preferably 10 μm or more, more preferably 12 μm or more (for example, 15 μm or more), and still more preferably 20 μm or more. The upper limit of the thickness TA of the core is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of thinning and weight reduction of the laminate, the thickness TA of the core is preferably 500 μm or less (for example, 300 μm or less), more preferably 270 μm or less, or 250 μm or less. 150 μm or less.
 ここに開示される積層体に含まれる芯体の材料は、特に限定されない。例えば芯体として、金属箔、樹脂フィルム、発泡体フィルム、紙、布、これらの複合体等を用いることができる。 The material of the core included in the laminate disclosed here is not particularly limited. For example, as the core, metal foil, resin film, foam film, paper, cloth, composites thereof, and the like can be used.
 積層体の耐歪み性を向上させる観点からは、芯体として金属箔を好ましく用いることができる。金属箔としては、ステンレス箔、アルミニウム箔、銅箔、チタン箔、亜鉛箔などの一般的な金属箔を用いることができる。なかでも、コスト、加工性の観点から、ステンレス箔、アルミニウム箔、銅箔を好適に用いることができる。金属箔は、単層の形態を有していてもよく、2層、3層またはそれ以上の多層構造を有するものであってもよい。例えば、金属箔の表面に異なる種類の金属がめっきされためっき箔であってもよい。あるいは、金属層と他の材料(例えば紙)で構成される層とを含む多層構造を有するものであってもよい。 From the viewpoint of improving the strain resistance of the laminate, a metal foil can be preferably used as the core. Common metal foils such as stainless steel foil, aluminum foil, copper foil, titanium foil, and zinc foil can be used as the metal foil. Among them, stainless steel foil, aluminum foil, and copper foil can be preferably used from the viewpoint of cost and workability. The metal foil may have the form of a single layer, or may have a multi-layered structure of two, three or more layers. For example, it may be a plated foil in which different kinds of metals are plated on the surface of a metal foil. Alternatively, it may have a multi-layer structure including a metal layer and a layer made of another material (eg, paper).
 あるいは、ベースフィルムとして樹脂フィルムを含むものを芯体として好ましく用いることができる。上記ベースフィルムは、典型的には、独立して形状維持可能な(非依存性の)部材である。ここに開示される技術における芯体は、このようなベースフィルムから実質的に構成されたものであり得る。あるいは、上記芯体は、上記ベースフィルムの他に、補助的な層を含むものであってもよい。上記補助的な層の例としては、上記ベースフィルムの表面に設けられた下塗り層、帯電防止層、着色層等が挙げられる。積層体の光透過率を低減させる観点からは、ベースポリマーの表面に着色層が配置された芯体を好ましく用いることができる。着色層に含まれる着色剤としては、後述する粘着シートに用いられる着色剤と同様のものが好ましく採用され得る。 Alternatively, a core containing a resin film as a base film can be preferably used. The base film is typically an independently shape-maintainable (independent) member. The core in the technique disclosed here can be substantially composed of such a base film. Alternatively, the core may contain an auxiliary layer in addition to the base film. Examples of the auxiliary layer include an undercoat layer, an antistatic layer, a colored layer, etc. provided on the surface of the base film. From the viewpoint of reducing the light transmittance of the laminate, a core having a colored layer disposed on the surface of the base polymer can be preferably used. As the colorant contained in the colored layer, the same colorant as used in the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet described later can be preferably employed.
 上記樹脂フィルムは、樹脂材料を主成分(当該樹脂フィルム中に50重量%を超えて含まれる成分)とするフィルムである。樹脂フィルムの例としては、ポリエチレン(PE)、ポリプロピレン(PP)、エチレン・プロピレン共重合体等のポリオレフィン系樹脂フィルム;ポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)、ポリブチレンテレフタレート(PBT)、ポリエチレンナフタレート(PEN)等のポリエステル系樹脂フィルム;塩化ビニル系樹脂フィルム;酢酸ビニル系樹脂フィルム;ポリイミド系樹脂フィルム;ポリアミド系樹脂フィルム;フッ素樹脂フィルム;セロハン;等が挙げられる。樹脂フィルムは、天然ゴムフィルム、ブチルゴムフィルム等のゴム系フィルムであってもよい。なかでも、ハンドリング性、加工性の観点から、ポリエステルフィルムが好ましく、そのなかでもPETフィルムが特に好ましい。 The above resin film is a film containing a resin material as a main component (a component contained in the resin film in excess of 50% by weight). Examples of resin films include polyolefin resin films such as polyethylene (PE), polypropylene (PP), and ethylene/propylene copolymer; polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polybutylene terephthalate (PBT), polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), and the like. vinyl chloride resin film; vinyl acetate resin film; polyimide resin film; polyamide resin film; fluorine resin film; The resin film may be a rubber-based film such as a natural rubber film or a butyl rubber film. Among them, from the viewpoint of handleability and workability, a polyester film is preferred, and a PET film is particularly preferred.
 上記樹脂フィルムは、単層構造であってもよく、2層、3層またはそれ以上の多層構造を有するものであってもよい。形状安定性の観点から、樹脂フィルムは単層構造であることが好ましい。多層構造の場合、少なくとも一つの層(好ましくは全ての層)は上記樹脂(例えばポリエステル系樹脂)の連続構造を有する層であることが好ましい。樹脂フィルムの製造方法は、従来公知の方法を適宜採用すればよく、特に限定されない。例えば、押出成形、インフレーション成形、Tダイキャスト成形、カレンダーロール成形等の従来公知の一般的なフィルム成形方法を適宜採用することができる。 The resin film may have a single-layer structure, or may have a multi-layer structure of two layers, three layers or more. From the viewpoint of shape stability, the resin film preferably has a single-layer structure. In the case of a multilayer structure, at least one layer (preferably all layers) is preferably a layer having a continuous structure of the resin (for example, polyester resin). The method for producing the resin film is not particularly limited, and a conventionally known method may be appropriately adopted. For example, conventionally known general film forming methods such as extrusion molding, inflation molding, T-die casting, and calender roll molding can be employed as appropriate.
 樹脂フィルム(PETフィルム等)を含む芯体には、必要に応じて、充填剤(無機充填剤、有機充填剤等)、着色剤、分散剤(界面活性剤等)、老化防止剤、酸化防止剤、紫外線吸収剤、帯電防止剤、滑剤、可塑剤等の各種添加剤が配合されていてもよい。各種添加剤の配合割合は、通常は凡そ30重量%未満(例えば凡そ20重量%未満、好ましくは凡そ10重量%未満)程度である。 If necessary, the core including the resin film (PET film, etc.) may contain fillers (inorganic fillers, organic fillers, etc.), colorants, dispersants (surfactants, etc.), anti-aging agents, antioxidants, etc. Various additives such as agents, ultraviolet absorbers, antistatic agents, lubricants and plasticizers may be blended. The blending ratio of various additives is usually less than about 30% by weight (for example, less than about 20% by weight, preferably less than about 10% by weight).
 いくつかの態様において、芯体材料として、発泡体フィルムが用いられ得る。芯体に用いられる発泡体フィルムとしては、気泡(気泡構造)を有する部分を備えたフィルムであって、典型的には、層状の発泡体(発泡体層)を少なくとも1層含むフィルムである。特に限定するものではないが、ここに開示される技術における発泡体フィルムの一好適例として、単層(1層)の発泡体層からなる発泡体フィルムが挙げられる。 In some embodiments, a foam film can be used as the core material. The foam film used for the core is a film having a portion with cells (cell structure), typically a film containing at least one stratified foam (foam layer). Although not particularly limited, a preferred example of the foam film in the technology disclosed herein is a foam film composed of a single (one) foam layer.
 他のいくつかの態様では、芯体材料として、紙や布が用いられる。芯体に用いられ得る紙の例としては、和紙、クラフト紙、グラシン紙、上質紙、合成紙、トップコート紙等が挙げられる。布の例としては、各種繊維状物質の単独または混紡等による織布や不織布等が挙げられる。上記繊維状物質としては、綿、スフ、マニラ麻、パルプ、レーヨン、アセテート繊維、ポリエステル繊維、ポリビニルアルコール繊維、ポリアミド繊維、ポリオレフィン繊維等が例示される。 In some other embodiments, paper or cloth is used as the core material. Examples of paper that can be used for the core include Japanese paper, kraft paper, glassine paper, woodfree paper, synthetic paper, top coat paper, and the like. Examples of fabrics include woven fabrics and non-woven fabrics obtained by spinning various fibrous materials alone or by blending them. Examples of the fibrous substance include cotton, staple fiber, manila hemp, pulp, rayon, acetate fiber, polyester fiber, polyvinyl alcohol fiber, polyamide fiber, and polyolefin fiber.
 なお、ここでいう不織布は、主として粘着テープその他の粘着シートの分野において使用される粘着シート用不織布を指す概念であって、典型的には一般的な抄紙機を用いて作製されるような不織布(いわゆる「紙」と称されることもある。)をいう。また、ここでいう樹脂フィルムとは、典型的には非多孔質の樹脂シートであって、例えば不織布とは区別される(すなわち、不織布を含まない)概念である。上記樹脂フィルムは、無延伸フィルム、一軸延伸フィルム、二軸延伸フィルムのいずれであってもよい。また、該基材の粘着剤層が設けられる面には、下塗り剤の塗布、コロナ放電処理、プラズマ処理等の表面処理が施されていてもよい。 The nonwoven fabric referred to here is a concept that refers to a nonwoven fabric for adhesive sheets that is mainly used in the field of adhesive tapes and other adhesive sheets, and is typically a nonwoven fabric that is produced using a general paper machine. (sometimes referred to as so-called "paper"). The term "resin film" as used herein is typically a non-porous resin sheet, which is distinguished from, for example, non-woven fabrics (that is, does not include non-woven fabrics). The resin film may be a non-stretched film, a uniaxially stretched film, or a biaxially stretched film. In addition, the surface of the substrate on which the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is to be provided may be subjected to surface treatment such as application of an undercoat, corona discharge treatment, plasma treatment, or the like.
 芯体の表面には、コロナ放電処理、プラズマ処理、紫外線照射処理、酸処理、アルカリ処理、下塗り剤の塗布等の、従来公知の表面処理が施されていてもよい。このような表面処理は、芯体と粘着シート(粘着剤層)との密着性、言い換えると粘着シート(粘着剤層)の芯体への投錨性を向上させるための処理であり得る。 The surface of the core may be subjected to conventionally known surface treatments such as corona discharge treatment, plasma treatment, ultraviolet irradiation treatment, acid treatment, alkali treatment, application of a primer, and the like. Such a surface treatment can be a treatment for improving the adhesion between the core and the adhesive sheet (adhesive layer), in other words, the anchoring property of the adhesive sheet (adhesive layer) to the core.
 <粘着シート>
 (25℃貯蔵弾性率)
 ここに開示される積層体に含まれる粘着シート(第1の粘着シートおよび第2の粘着シートの一方または両方。以下同じ。)は、粘着シートの25℃における貯蔵弾性率G´(25℃)は0.20MPa未満であることによって特徴づけられる。上記G´(25℃)が所定値未満の粘着シートを用いると、積層体の段差追従性が向上する傾向にある。上記G´(25℃)は、好ましくは0.19MPa未満、より好ましくは0.18MPa未満、さらに好ましくは凡そ0.17MPa未満(例えば0.15MPa未満)、特に好ましくは0.14MPa未満であり、0.1MPa未満であってもよい。上記G´(25℃)の下限は特に限定されないが、接着性の観点からは、上記G´(25℃)は0.02MPa以上であることが好ましく、より好ましくは0.035MPa以上であってもよく、0.05MPa以上でもよく、0.1MPa以上でもよく、0.12MPa以上でもよい。
<Adhesive sheet>
(25°C storage modulus)
The pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet (one or both of the first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet; the same shall apply hereinafter) contained in the laminate disclosed herein has a storage elastic modulus G' at 25°C of the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet (25°C) is characterized by being less than 0.20 MPa. When a pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet having a G' (25°C) of less than a predetermined value is used, the conformability of the laminate to steps tends to be improved. The G' (25°C) is preferably less than 0.19 MPa, more preferably less than 0.18 MPa, still more preferably less than about 0.17 MPa (e.g., less than 0.15 MPa), particularly preferably less than 0.14 MPa, It may be less than 0.1 MPa. The lower limit of the G' (25 ° C.) is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of adhesion, the G' (25 ° C.) is preferably 0.02 MPa or more, more preferably 0.035 MPa or more. 0.05 MPa or more, 0.1 MPa or more, or 0.12 MPa or more.
 (85℃貯蔵弾性率)
 いくつかの態様において、粘着シートの85℃における貯蔵弾性率G´(85℃)は0.08MPa未満であり得る。上記G´(85℃)が所定値未満の粘着シートを用いると、積層体の段差追従性が向上する傾向にある。上記G´(85℃)は、好ましくは0.07MPa未満、より好ましくは0.06MPa未満、さらに好ましくは凡そ0.05MPa未満(例えば0.045MPa未満)である。上記G´(85℃)の下限は特に限定されないが、接着性の観点からは、上記G´(85℃)は通常0.01MPa以上であることが適当であり、好ましくは0.02MPa以上であり、0.03MPa以上であってもよく、0.04MPa以上でもよい。
(85°C storage modulus)
In some embodiments, the PSA sheet may have a storage modulus G'(85°C) at 85°C of less than 0.08 MPa. When a pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet having a G' (85°C) of less than a predetermined value is used, the conformability of the laminate to steps tends to be improved. The G′ (85° C.) is preferably less than 0.07 MPa, more preferably less than 0.06 MPa, even more preferably less than about 0.05 MPa (for example, less than 0.045 MPa). The lower limit of the G' (85 ° C.) is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of adhesion, the G' (85 ° C.) is usually 0.01 MPa or more, preferably 0.02 MPa or more. Yes, it may be 0.03 MPa or more, or 0.04 MPa or more.
 (120℃貯蔵弾性率)
 いくつかの態様において、粘着シートの120℃における貯蔵弾性率G´(120℃)は0.04MPa未満であり得る。上記G´(120℃)が所定値未満の粘着シートを用いると、積層体の段差追従性が向上する傾向にある。上記G´(120℃)は、好ましくは0.035MPa未満、より好ましくは0.033MPa未満、さらに好ましくは0.03MPa未満(例えば0.028MPa未満)である。上記G´(120℃)の下限は特に限定されないが、接着性の観点からは、上記G´(120℃)は通常は0.01MPa以上であることが適当であり、好ましくは0.015MPa以上であり、より好ましくは0.02MPa以上でもあり、さらに好ましくは0.023MPa以上でもある。
(120°C storage modulus)
In some aspects, the storage modulus G'(120°C) at 120°C of the PSA sheet can be less than 0.04 MPa. When a pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet having a G' (120°C) of less than a predetermined value is used, the conformability of the laminate to unevenness tends to be improved. The G′ (120° C.) is preferably less than 0.035 MPa, more preferably less than 0.033 MPa, still more preferably less than 0.03 MPa (for example, less than 0.028 MPa). The lower limit of the G' (120 ° C.) is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of adhesion, the G' (120 ° C.) is usually 0.01 MPa or more, preferably 0.015 MPa or more. , more preferably 0.02 MPa or more, and still more preferably 0.023 MPa or more.
 上述の粘着シートの粘弾性特性は、本明細書の記載内容に基づき、粘着剤層に含まれるベースポリマーのモノマー組成を調節すること、必要に応じて粘着付与樹脂の種類や使用量を適切に選択すること、必要に応じて他の成分(架橋剤等)を含む粘着剤組成を適切に設定すること、ポリマーの重合条件や粘着剤層の製造条件等によって調節することができる。 The viscoelastic properties of the above-mentioned pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet can be obtained by adjusting the monomer composition of the base polymer contained in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer and, if necessary, by appropriately adjusting the type and amount of the tackifying resin based on the contents described in this specification. It can be adjusted by selecting, appropriately setting the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing other components (such as a cross-linking agent) as necessary, polymer polymerization conditions, pressure-sensitive adhesive layer manufacturing conditions, and the like.
 ここに開示される技術において、粘着シートの25℃貯蔵弾性率、85℃貯蔵弾性率および120℃貯蔵弾性率は、動的粘弾性測定により求めることができる。具体的には、測定対象である粘着シートを複数枚重ね合わせることにより、厚さ約2mmの試験片を作製する。この試験片を直径7.9mmの円盤状に打ち抜いた試料をパラレルプレートで挟み込んで固定し、粘弾性試験機(例えば、ティー・エー・インスツルメント社製、ARESまたはその相当品)により以下の条件で動的粘弾性測定を行い、25℃貯蔵弾性率、85℃貯蔵弾性率および120℃貯蔵弾性率を求める。
 ・測定モード:せん断モード
 ・温度範囲 :-70℃~150℃
 ・昇温速度 :5℃/min
 ・測定周波数:1Hz
 後述の実施例においても上記の方法で測定される。
In the technology disclosed herein, the 25° C. storage modulus, 85° C. storage modulus and 120° C. storage modulus of the PSA sheet can be determined by dynamic viscoelasticity measurement. Specifically, a test piece having a thickness of about 2 mm is prepared by stacking a plurality of adhesive sheets to be measured. This test piece was punched into a disk shape with a diameter of 7.9 mm. A dynamic viscoelasticity measurement is performed under the conditions to obtain a 25°C storage modulus, an 85°C storage modulus and a 120°C storage modulus.
・Measurement mode: Shear mode ・Temperature range: -70°C to 150°C
・Temperature increase rate: 5°C/min
・Measurement frequency: 1Hz
It is also measured by the above method in the examples described later.
 ここに開示される粘着シート(剥離ライナーを含まない。)の厚さTは3μm以上であることが適当であり、5μm以上が好ましく、より好ましくは10μm超、さらに好ましくは15μm以上である。粘着シートの厚さTを大きくすることにより、段差追従性と粘着特性とが両立して向上しやすい。粘着シートの厚さTは、薄膜化の観点から、例えば500μm以下とすることができ、通常は350μm以下が適当であり、270μm以下(例えば250μm以下)が好ましい。 The thickness T B of the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet (not including a release liner) disclosed herein is suitably 3 μm or more, preferably 5 μm or more, more preferably over 10 μm, and still more preferably 15 μm or more. By increasing the thickness TB of the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet, it is easy to improve both the conformability to irregularities and the pressure-sensitive adhesive properties. The thickness T B of the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet can be, for example, 500 μm or less, preferably 350 μm or less, and preferably 270 μm or less (for example, 250 μm or less) from the viewpoint of thinning.
 上記粘着シートが基材を含まない基材レス粘着シートである場合、該基材レス粘着シートの厚さTB1は、通常は3μm以上が適当であり、5μm以上が好ましく、より好ましくは10μm以上、さらに好ましくは15μm以上である。基材レス粘着シートの厚さTB1を大きくすることにより、段差追従性と粘着特性とが両立して向上しやすい。基材レス粘着シートの厚さTB1は、通常は200μm以下が適当であり、薄膜化の観点から、100μm以下が好ましく、より好ましくは70μm以下(例えば60μm以下)、さらに好ましくは50μm以下である。 When the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is a substrate-less pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet that does not contain a substrate, the thickness T B1 of the substrate-less pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is usually appropriately 3 μm or more, preferably 5 μm or more, and more preferably 10 μm or more. , more preferably 15 μm or more. By increasing the thickness TB1 of the substrate-less pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet, it is easy to improve both the step conformability and the pressure-sensitive adhesive properties. The thickness T B1 of the substrate-less pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is usually appropriately 200 μm or less, and from the viewpoint of thinning, it is preferably 100 μm or less, more preferably 70 μm or less (e.g., 60 μm or less), and still more preferably 50 μm or less. .
 上記粘着シートが基材を含む基材付き粘着シートである場合、該基材付き粘着シートの厚さTB2は、10μm超であることが好ましく、より好ましくは20μm以上、さらに好ましくは25μm以上、特に好ましくは30μm以上である。基材付き粘着シートの厚さTB2を大きくすることにより、段差追従性と粘着特性とが両立して向上しやすい。基材付き粘着シートの厚さTB2は、通常は500μm以下が適当であり、薄膜化の観点から、300μm以下が好ましく、より好ましくは270μm以下(例えば260μm以下)であり、150μm以下であってもよい。 When the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is a pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate containing a substrate, the thickness T B2 of the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate is preferably more than 10 μm, more preferably 20 μm or more, and still more preferably 25 μm or more, Especially preferably, it is 30 μm or more. By increasing the thickness TB2 of the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate, it is easy to improve both the conformability to irregularities and the pressure-sensitive adhesive properties. The thickness T B2 of the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate is usually suitably 500 μm or less, preferably 300 μm or less, more preferably 270 μm or less (for example, 260 μm or less), and 150 μm or less from the viewpoint of thinning. good too.
 粘着シートの光透過率Cは特に限定されない。ここに開示される技術において、意匠性を付与したり、積層体の遮光性を向上させる観点から、光透過率Cが20%以下(好ましくは10%以下、さらに好ましくは5%以下、特に好ましくは1.5%以下)の粘着シートを用いてもよい。上記光透過率Cの下限は特に制限されず、実質的に0%、すなわち検出限界以下であってもよく、1%以上でもよく、5%以上でもよく、15%以上でもよい。他のいくつかの態様において、粘着シートの光透過率Cは30%超であってもよく、50%超であってもよく、70%以上(例えば75%以上)でもよい。 The light transmittance CB of the adhesive sheet is not particularly limited. In the technology disclosed herein, from the viewpoint of imparting designability and improving the light shielding property of the laminate, the light transmittance CB is 20% or less (preferably 10% or less, more preferably 5% or less, especially (preferably 1.5% or less) may be used. The lower limit of the light transmittance CB is not particularly limited, and may be substantially 0%, that is, the detection limit or less, 1% or more, 5% or more, or 15% or more. In some other embodiments, the light transmittance C B of the adhesive sheet may be greater than 30%, may be greater than 50%, or may be 70% or more (eg, 75% or more).
 ここに開示される技術において、粘着シートの光透過率Cは下記の方法で測定することができる。後述の実施例においても下記の方法で測定される。 In the technique disclosed here, the light transmittance CB of the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet can be measured by the following method. Also in the examples described later, it is measured by the following method.
 [光透過率C
 粘着シートの光透過率C[%]は、剥離ライナーから剥がした粘着シートの厚さ方向の光透過率(波長550nmの光透過率)であり、JIS K 7136:2000に準拠して、市販の透過率計を使用して測定される。透過率計としては、日立製作所製の分光光度計(装置名「U4150型分光光度計」)またはその相当品が用いられる。
[Light transmittance C B ]
The light transmittance CB [%] of the adhesive sheet is the light transmittance in the thickness direction of the adhesive sheet peeled off from the release liner (light transmittance at a wavelength of 550 nm). is measured using a transmissometer. As the transmittance meter, a spectrophotometer manufactured by Hitachi (apparatus name “U4150 type spectrophotometer”) or an equivalent thereof is used.
 (粘着剤)
 ここに開示される技術において、粘着シートに含まれる粘着剤層を構成する粘着剤の種類は特に限定されない。上記粘着剤は、粘着剤の分野において用いられ得るアクリル系ポリマー、ゴム系ポリマー(天然ゴム、合成ゴム、これらの混合物等)、ポリエステル系ポリマー、ウレタン系ポリマー、ポリエーテル系ポリマー、シリコーン系ポリマー、ポリアミド系ポリマー、フッ素系ポリマー等の各種ゴム状ポリマーの1種または2種以上を粘着性ポリマー(粘着剤を形づくる構造ポリマーという意味で、以下「ベースポリマー」ともいう。)として含むものであり得る。粘着性能やコスト等の観点から、アクリル系ポリマーまたはゴム系ポリマーをベースポリマーとして含む粘着剤を好ましく採用し得る。なかでもアクリル系ポリマーをベースポリマーとする粘着剤(アクリル系粘着剤)が好ましい。ここに開示される技術は、アクリル系粘着剤を用いる態様で好ましく実施される。
(adhesive)
In the technology disclosed herein, the type of adhesive that constitutes the adhesive layer contained in the adhesive sheet is not particularly limited. The adhesives include acrylic polymers, rubber polymers (natural rubber, synthetic rubber, mixtures thereof, etc.), polyester polymers, urethane polymers, polyether polymers, silicone polymers, which can be used in the field of adhesives. It may contain one or more of various rubber-like polymers such as polyamide-based polymers and fluorine-based polymers as an adhesive polymer (in the sense of a structural polymer that forms an adhesive, hereinafter also referred to as "base polymer"). . From the viewpoint of adhesive performance, cost, etc., a pressure-sensitive adhesive containing an acrylic polymer or a rubber-based polymer as a base polymer can be preferably employed. Among them, a pressure-sensitive adhesive having an acrylic polymer as a base polymer (acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive) is preferable. The technique disclosed here is preferably implemented in a mode using an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive.
 以下、アクリル系粘着剤により構成された粘着剤層、すなわちアクリル系粘着剤層を有する粘着シートについて主に説明するが、ここに開示される粘着シートの粘着剤層をアクリル系粘着剤により構成されたものに限定する意図ではない。 A pressure-sensitive adhesive layer composed of an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive, that is, a pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet having an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive layer will be mainly described below. It is not intended to be limited to
 ここで、粘着剤の「ベースポリマー」とは、該粘着剤に含まれるゴム状ポリマーの主成分をいい、このこと以外、何ら限定的に解釈されるものではない。上記ゴム状ポリマーとは、室温付近の温度域においてゴム弾性を示すポリマーをいう。また、この明細書において「主成分」とは、特記しない場合、50重量%を超えて含まれる成分を指す。 Here, the "base polymer" of the adhesive refers to the main component of the rubber-like polymer contained in the adhesive, and is not to be construed as being limited to anything other than this. The term "rubber-like polymer" refers to a polymer that exhibits rubber elasticity in a temperature range around room temperature. In this specification, the term "main component" refers to a component contained in an amount exceeding 50% by weight unless otherwise specified.
 また、「アクリル系ポリマー」とは、該ポリマーを構成するモノマー単位として、1分子中に少なくとも一つの(メタ)アクリロイル基を有するモノマーに由来するモノマー単位を含む重合物をいう。以下、1分子中に少なくとも一つの(メタ)アクリロイル基を有するモノマーを「アクリル系モノマー」ともいう。したがって、この明細書におけるアクリル系ポリマーは、アクリル系モノマーに由来するモノマー単位を含むポリマーとして定義される。アクリル系ポリマーの典型例として、該アクリル系ポリマーの合成に用いられる全モノマー成分のうちアクリル系モノマーの割合が50重量%より多いアクリル系ポリマーが挙げられる。
 また、「(メタ)アクリロイル」とは、アクリロイルおよびメタクリロイルを包括的に指す意味である。同様に、「(メタ)アクリレート」とはアクリレートおよびメタクリレートを、「(メタ)アクリル」とはアクリルおよびメタクリルを、それぞれ包括的に指す意味である。
Further, the term "acrylic polymer" refers to a polymer containing monomer units derived from a monomer having at least one (meth)acryloyl group in one molecule as monomer units constituting the polymer. Hereinafter, a monomer having at least one (meth)acryloyl group in one molecule is also referred to as "acrylic monomer". Accordingly, an acrylic polymer in this specification is defined as a polymer containing monomeric units derived from an acrylic monomer. A typical example of an acrylic polymer is an acrylic polymer containing more than 50% by weight of the acrylic monomer in the total monomer components used to synthesize the acrylic polymer.
In addition, "(meth)acryloyl" is a generic term for acryloyl and methacryloyl. Similarly, "(meth)acrylate" is a generic term for acrylate and methacrylate, and "(meth)acrylic" is generic for acrylic and methacrylic.
 (アクリル系ポリマー)
 ここに開示される技術において、ポリマーとして用いられるアクリル系ポリマーとしては、例えば、アルキル(メタ)アクリレートを主モノマーとして含み、該主モノマーと共重合性を有する副モノマーをさらに含み得るモノマー原料の重合物が好ましい。ここで主モノマーとは、上記モノマー原料におけるモノマー組成の50重量%超を占める成分をいう。
(acrylic polymer)
In the technique disclosed herein, the acrylic polymer used as the polymer includes, for example, an alkyl (meth)acrylate as a main monomer, and may further include a sub-monomer copolymerizable with the main monomer. things are preferred. Here, the main monomer refers to a component that accounts for more than 50% by weight of the monomer composition in the monomer raw material.
 アルキル(メタ)アクリレートとしては、例えば下記式(1)で表される化合物を好適に用いることができる。
 CH=C(R)COOR     (1)
 ここで、上記式(1)中のRは水素原子またはメチル基である。また、Rは炭素原子数1~20の鎖状アルキル基である。以下、このような炭素原子数の範囲を「C1-20」と表すことがある。粘着剤の貯蔵弾性率等の観点から、RがC1-14(例えばC1-10、典型的にはC4-8)の鎖状アルキル基であるアルキル(メタ)アクリレートを主モノマーとすることが適当である。Rがブチル基または2-エチルヘキシル基であるアルキル(メタ)アクリレートが好ましい。また、粘着特性の観点から、Rが水素原子であってRがC4-8の鎖状アルキル基であるアルキルアクリレート(以下、単にC4-8アルキルアクリレートともいう。)を主モノマーとすることが好ましい。
As the alkyl (meth)acrylate, for example, a compound represented by the following formula (1) can be preferably used.
CH2 =C( R1 ) COOR2 (1)
Here, R 1 in the above formula (1) is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. R 2 is a chain alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. Hereinafter, such a carbon atom number range may be expressed as "C 1-20 ". From the viewpoint of the storage elastic modulus of the adhesive, an alkyl (meth)acrylate in which R 2 is a C 1-14 (for example, C 1-10 , typically C 4-8 ) chain alkyl group is used as the main monomer. It is appropriate to Alkyl (meth)acrylates in which R 2 is a butyl group or a 2-ethylhexyl group are preferred. In addition, from the viewpoint of adhesive properties, an alkyl acrylate in which R 1 is a hydrogen atom and R 2 is a C 4-8 chain alkyl group (hereinafter also simply referred to as C 4-8 alkyl acrylate) is used as the main monomer. preferably.
 RがC1-20の鎖状アルキル基であるアルキル(メタ)アクリレートの具体例としては、特に限定されないが、例えばメチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチル(メタ)アクリレート、プロピル(メタ)アクリレート、イソプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、n-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソブチル(メタ)アクリレート、s-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、t-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、ペンチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソペンチル(メタ)アクリレート、ヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、ヘプチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、オクチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソオクチル(メタ)アクリレート、ノニル(メタ)アクリレート、イソノニル(メタ)アクリレート、デシル(メタ)アクリレート、イソデシル(メタ)アクリレート、ウンデシル(メタ)アクリレート、ドデシル(メタ)アクリレート、トリデシル(メタ)アクリレート、テトラデシル(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタデシル(メタ)アクリレート、ヘキサデシル(メタ)アクリレート、ヘプタデシル(メタ)アクリレート、オクタデシル(メタ)アクリレート、ノナデシル(メタ)アクリレート、エイコシル(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。これらアルキル(メタ)アクリレートは、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。アルキル(メタ)アクリレートの好適例として、n-ブチルアクリレート(BA)および2-エチルヘキシルアクリレート(2EHA)が挙げられる。特に好ましいアルキル(メタ)アクリレートとして、n-ブチルアクリレート(BA)および2-エチルヘキシルアクリレート(2EHA)が挙げられる。 Specific examples of alkyl (meth)acrylates in which R 2 is a C 1-20 chain alkyl group include, but are not limited to, methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, propyl (meth)acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, s-butyl (meth) acrylate, t-butyl (meth) acrylate, pentyl (meth) acrylate, isopentyl (meth) acrylate, hexyl (meth) ) acrylate, heptyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, octyl (meth) acrylate, isooctyl (meth) acrylate, nonyl (meth) acrylate, isononyl (meth) acrylate, decyl (meth) acrylate, isodecyl (meth) acrylate ) acrylate, undecyl (meth)acrylate, dodecyl (meth)acrylate, tridecyl (meth)acrylate, tetradecyl (meth)acrylate, pentadecyl (meth)acrylate, hexadecyl (meth)acrylate, heptadecyl (meth)acrylate, octadecyl (meth)acrylate , nonadecyl (meth)acrylate, eicosyl (meth)acrylate and the like. These alkyl (meth)acrylates may be used singly or in combination of two or more. Suitable examples of alkyl (meth)acrylates include n-butyl acrylate (BA) and 2-ethylhexyl acrylate (2EHA). Particularly preferred alkyl (meth)acrylates include n-butyl acrylate (BA) and 2-ethylhexyl acrylate (2EHA).
 アクリル系ポリマーを構成するモノマー成分に占めるアルキル(メタ)アクリレートの割合は、典型的には50重量%超であり、例えば70重量%以上とすることができ、85重量%以上としてもよく、90重量%以上としてもよい。アルキル(メタ)アクリレートの割合の上限は特に限定されないが、99.5重量%以下(例えば99重量%以下)とすることが好ましく、あるいは、カルボキシ基含有モノマー等の副モノマーに基づく特性(例えば凝集力)を好ましく発揮させる観点から、98重量%以下(例えば97重量%未満)としてもよい。あるいは、アクリル系ポリマーは実質的にアルキル(メタ)アクリレートのみを重合したものであってもよい。 The ratio of the alkyl (meth)acrylate to the monomer components constituting the acrylic polymer is typically more than 50% by weight, and can be, for example, 70% by weight or more, and may be 85% by weight or more, or 90% by weight. % by weight or more. The upper limit of the ratio of alkyl (meth)acrylate is not particularly limited, but it is preferably 99.5% by weight or less (for example, 99% by weight or less), or properties based on submonomers such as carboxy group-containing monomers (for example, aggregation 98% by weight or less (for example, less than 97% by weight) from the viewpoint of preferably exerting force). Alternatively, the acrylic polymer may be obtained by polymerizing substantially only alkyl (meth)acrylate.
 また、モノマー成分としてC4-8アルキルアクリレートを使用する場合、該モノマー成分中に含まれるアルキル(メタ)アクリレートのうちC4-8アルキルアクリレートの割合は、70重量%以上であることが好ましく、90重量%以上であることがより好ましい。 Further, when C 4-8 alkyl acrylate is used as a monomer component, the proportion of C 4-8 alkyl acrylate in the alkyl (meth)acrylate contained in the monomer component is preferably 70% by weight or more, It is more preferably 90% by weight or more.
 ここに開示される技術は、上記アクリル系ポリマーを構成するモノマー成分がBAおよび2EHAの少なくとも一方を含み、該モノマー成分に含まれるアルキル(メタ)アクリレートのうちBAと2EHAとの合計量が75重量%以上(通常は85重量%以上、例えば90重量%以上、さらには95重量%以上)を占める態様で好ましく実施され得る。ここに開示される技術は、例えば、上記モノマー成分に含まれるアルキル(メタ)アクリレートが、BA単独である態様、2EHA単独である態様、BAと2EHAとからなる態様等で実施することができる。 In the technique disclosed herein, the monomer component constituting the acrylic polymer contains at least one of BA and 2EHA, and the total amount of BA and 2EHA in the alkyl (meth)acrylate contained in the monomer component is 75 wt. % or more (usually 85 wt% or more, for example 90 wt% or more, further 95 wt% or more). The technology disclosed herein can be practiced, for example, in a mode in which the alkyl (meth)acrylate contained in the monomer component is BA alone, 2EHA alone, BA and 2EHA, and the like.
 いくつかの好ましい態様において、上記アクリル系ポリマーを構成するモノマー成分は、C1-6アルキル(メタ)アクリレートを50重量%以上含む。換言すると、上記アクリル系ポリマーにおけるC1-6アルキル(メタ)アクリレートの重合割合は50重量%以上であることが好ましい。このようにC1-6アルキル(メタ)アクリレートを主モノマーとして使用することで、貯蔵弾性率を適度に向上することができる。この態様において、モノマー成分に占めるC1-6アルキル(メタ)アクリレートの割合(換言すると重合割合)は、好ましくは80重量%以上、より好ましくは90重量%以上、さらに好ましくは92重量%以上(例えば95重量%超)である。モノマー成分に占めるC1-6アルキル(メタ)アクリレートの割合の上限は、特に制限されず、通常は99重量%以下、他の共重合性モノマーの使用割合との関係から、98重量%以下であることが適当であり、97重量%以下とすることが好ましく、95重量%未満であってもよい。C1-6アルキル(メタ)アクリレートは、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。C1-6アルキル(メタ)アクリレートとしては、C1-6アルキルアクリレートが好ましく、C2-6アルキルアクリレートがより好ましく、C4-6アルキルアクリレートがさらに好ましい。他のいくつかの態様では、C1-6アルキル(メタ)アクリレートは、好ましくはC1-4アルキルアクリレートであり、より好ましくはC2-4アルキルアクリレートである。C1-6アルキル(メタ)アクリレートの好適例としてBAが挙げられる。 In some preferred embodiments, the monomer component constituting the acrylic polymer contains 50% by weight or more of C 1-6 alkyl (meth)acrylate. In other words, the polymerization ratio of C 1-6 alkyl (meth)acrylate in the acrylic polymer is preferably 50% by weight or more. By using the C 1-6 alkyl (meth)acrylate as the main monomer in this way, the storage modulus can be moderately improved. In this embodiment, the ratio of C 1-6 alkyl (meth)acrylate in the monomer component (in other words, polymerization ratio) is preferably 80% by weight or more, more preferably 90% by weight or more, and still more preferably 92% by weight or more ( for example greater than 95% by weight). The upper limit of the ratio of C 1-6 alkyl (meth)acrylate in the monomer component is not particularly limited, and is usually 99% by weight or less, and 98% by weight or less in relation to the proportion of other copolymerizable monomers used. 97% by weight or less is preferable, and it may be less than 95% by weight. The C 1-6 alkyl (meth)acrylates may be used singly or in combination of two or more. The C 1-6 alkyl (meth)acrylate is preferably a C 1-6 alkyl acrylate, more preferably a C 2-6 alkyl acrylate, and even more preferably a C 4-6 alkyl acrylate. In some other aspects, the C 1-6 alkyl (meth)acrylate is preferably a C 1-4 alkyl acrylate, more preferably a C 2-4 alkyl acrylate. Preferred examples of C 1-6 alkyl (meth)acrylates include BA.
 他のいくつかの好ましい態様において、上記アクリル系ポリマーを構成するモノマー成分は、C7-10アルキル(メタ)アクリレートを50重量%以上含む。換言すると、上記アクリル系ポリマーにおけるC7-10アルキル(メタ)アクリレートの共重合割合は50重量%以上であることが好ましい。このようにC7-10アルキル(メタ)アクリレートを主モノマーとして使用することで、25℃貯蔵弾性率を好ましく低下することができ、これによって柔軟性を高めて被着体との追従性を向上させることができる。モノマー成分に占めるC7-10アルキル(メタ)アクリレートの割合(換言すると共重合割合)は、60重量%超であってもよく、70重量%超でもよく、より好ましくは80重量%よりも大きく、さらに好ましくは90重量%以上、特に好ましくは92重量%以上(例えば95重量%以上)である。モノマー成分に占めるC7-10アルキル(メタ)アクリレートの割合の上限は、特に限定されず、通常は99重量%以下、他の共重合性モノマー(例えば酸性基含有モノマー)の使用割合との関係から、97重量%以下であることが適当であり、96重量%以下とすることが好ましい。C7-10アルキル(メタ)アクリレートは、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。C7-10アルキル(メタ)アクリレートの好適例として、2EHA、イソオクチルアクリレート、イソノニルアクリレート等のC7-10アルキルアクリレートが挙げられる。なかでも2EHAが好ましい。 In some other preferred embodiments, the monomer component constituting the acrylic polymer contains 50% by weight or more of C 7-10 alkyl (meth)acrylate. In other words, the copolymerization ratio of C 7-10 alkyl (meth)acrylate in the acrylic polymer is preferably 50% by weight or more. By using a C7-10 alkyl (meth)acrylate as a main monomer in this way, the 25°C storage elastic modulus can be preferably lowered, thereby increasing the flexibility and improving the conformability to the adherend. can be made The ratio of C 7-10 alkyl (meth)acrylate in the monomer component (in other words, copolymerization ratio) may be greater than 60% by weight, may be greater than 70% by weight, and more preferably greater than 80% by weight. , more preferably 90% by weight or more, particularly preferably 92% by weight or more (for example, 95% by weight or more). The upper limit of the ratio of C 7-10 alkyl (meth)acrylate in the monomer component is not particularly limited, and is usually 99% by weight or less, and the relationship with the ratio of other copolymerizable monomers (eg, acidic group-containing monomers). Therefore, it is suitable that the content is 97% by weight or less, and preferably 96% by weight or less. The C 7-10 alkyl (meth)acrylates can be used singly or in combination of two or more. Suitable examples of C 7-10 alkyl (meth)acrylates include C 7-10 alkyl acrylates such as 2EHA, isooctyl acrylate, isononyl acrylate. Among them, 2EHA is preferable.
 ここに開示される技術におけるアクリル系ポリマーには、副モノマーが共重合されていてもよい。アクリル系ポリマーに架橋基点となり得る官能基を導入し、あるいは接着力の向上に寄与し得る副モノマーとして、カルボキシ基含有モノマー、水酸基(OH基)含有モノマー(2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、4-ヒドロキシブチル(メタ)アクリレート等)、酸無水物基含有モノマー、アミド基含有モノマー((メタ)アクリルアミド、N,N-ジメチル(メタ)アクリルアミド等)、アミノ基含有モノマー(アミノエチル(メタ)アクリレート、N,N-ジメチルアミノエチル(メタ)アクリレート等)、エポキシ基含有モノマー、シアノ基含有モノマー、ケト基含有モノマー、窒素原子含有環を有するモノマー(N-ビニル-2-ピロリドン、N-(メタ)アクリロイルモルホリン等)、アルコキシシリル基含有モノマー、イミド基含有モノマー類等が挙げられる。上記副モノマーは、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。 The acrylic polymer in the technology disclosed here may be copolymerized with a sub-monomer. A carboxy group-containing monomer, a hydroxyl group (OH group)-containing monomer (2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 4 - hydroxybutyl (meth) acrylate, etc.), acid anhydride group-containing monomers, amide group-containing monomers ((meth) acrylamide, N,N-dimethyl (meth) acrylamide, etc.), amino group-containing monomers (aminoethyl (meth) acrylate , N,N-dimethylaminoethyl (meth)acrylate, etc.), epoxy group-containing monomers, cyano group-containing monomers, keto group-containing monomers, monomers having a nitrogen atom-containing ring (N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-(meth) ) acryloylmorpholine, etc.), alkoxysilyl group-containing monomers, imide group-containing monomers, and the like. The said submonomer can be used individually by 1 type or in combination of 2 or more types.
 アクリル系ポリマーを構成するモノマー成分が上述の官能基含有モノマーを含む場合、該モノマー成分における官能基含有モノマーの含有量は特に限定されない。官能基含有モノマーの使用による効果を適切に発揮する観点から、モノマー成分における官能基含有モノマーの含有量は、例えば0.1重量%以上とすることができ、0.5重量%以上とすることが適当であり、1重量%以上としてもよい。また、主モノマーとの関係で粘着性能のバランスをとりやすくする観点から、モノマー成分における官能基含有モノマーの含有量は、40重量%以下とすることが適当であり、20重量%以下とすることが好ましく、10重量%以下(例えば5重量%以下)としてもよい。 When the monomer component constituting the acrylic polymer contains the functional group-containing monomer described above, the content of the functional group-containing monomer in the monomer component is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of appropriately exhibiting the effect of using the functional group-containing monomer, the content of the functional group-containing monomer in the monomer component can be, for example, 0.1% by weight or more, and should be 0.5% by weight or more. is suitable, and it may be 1% by weight or more. In addition, from the viewpoint of easily balancing the adhesion performance in relation to the main monomer, the content of the functional group-containing monomer in the monomer component is appropriately 40% by weight or less, and is 20% by weight or less. is preferable, and it may be 10% by weight or less (for example, 5% by weight or less).
 いくつかの好ましい態様では、主モノマーであるアルキル(メタ)アクリレートと共重合性を有するモノマーとして酸性基含有モノマーを使用する。酸性基含有モノマーは、その極性に基づく凝集性向上と、極性被着体に対する良好な結合力を発揮することができる。また、イソシアネート系、エポキシ系架橋剤等の架橋剤を使用する場合には、当該酸性基(典型的にはカルボキシ基)がアクリル系ポリマーの架橋点となる。 In some preferred embodiments, an acidic group-containing monomer is used as a monomer copolymerizable with the main monomer alkyl (meth)acrylate. The acidic group-containing monomer can improve cohesiveness based on its polarity and exhibit good bonding strength to polar adherends. When using a cross-linking agent such as an isocyanate-based or epoxy-based cross-linking agent, the acidic group (typically a carboxyl group) becomes a cross-linking point of the acrylic polymer.
 酸性基含有モノマーとしては、カルボキシ基含有モノマーが好ましく用いられる。カルボキシ基含有モノマーとしては、例えばアクリル酸(AA)、メタクリル酸(MAA)、カルボキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、クロトン酸、イソクロトン酸等のエチレン性不飽和モノカルボン酸;マレイン酸、イタコン酸、シトラコン酸等のエチレン性不飽和ジカルボン酸およびその無水物(無水マレイン酸、無水イタコン酸等)が挙げられる。また、酸性基含有モノマーは、カルボキシ基の金属塩(例えばアルカリ金属塩)を有するモノマーであってもよい。なかでも、AAおよびMAAが好ましく、AAがより好ましい。 A carboxy group-containing monomer is preferably used as the acidic group-containing monomer. Examples of carboxy group-containing monomers include ethylenically unsaturated monocarboxylic acids such as acrylic acid (AA), methacrylic acid (MAA), carboxyethyl (meth)acrylate, crotonic acid and isocrotonic acid; maleic acid, itaconic acid and citraconic acid; ethylenically unsaturated dicarboxylic acids such as and anhydrides thereof (maleic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, etc.). The acidic group-containing monomer may also be a monomer having a metal salt (for example, an alkali metal salt) of a carboxy group. Among them, AA and MAA are preferred, and AA is more preferred.
 ここに開示される技術において、モノマー成分に占める酸性基含有モノマー(典型的にはカルボキシ基含有モノマー)の含有量(換言すると、アクリル系ポリマーにおける酸性基含有モノマーの共重合割合)は、1.0重量%以上とすることが適当である。所定量以上の酸性基含有モノマーを使用することで、粘着剤層の凝集力を向上させることができる。アクリル系ポリマーにおける酸性基含有モノマーの共重合割合は、好ましくは1.5重量%以上、より好ましくは2.0重量%以上、さらに好ましくは2.5重量%以上、特に好ましくは3.0重量%以上である。いくつかの好ましい態様において、アクリル系ポリマーにおける酸性基含有モノマーの共重合割合は、4.0重量%以上であり、5.0重量%超であってもよく、6.0重量%以上でもよく、6.5重量%以上でもよい。アクリル系ポリマーにおける酸性基含有モノマーの共重合割合は、通常は20重量%以下とすることが適当であり、被着体への密着性、ひいては追従性を改善する観点から、好ましくは10重量%未満、より好ましくは8.0重量%未満、さらに好ましくは7.0重量%未満、特に好ましくは6.0重量%未満であり、5.0重量%未満(例えば4.0重量%未満)でもよい。 In the technology disclosed herein, the content of an acidic group-containing monomer (typically a carboxy group-containing monomer) in the monomer component (in other words, the copolymerization ratio of the acidic group-containing monomer in the acrylic polymer) is 1. A content of 0% by weight or more is appropriate. By using a predetermined amount or more of the acidic group-containing monomer, the cohesive strength of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer can be improved. The copolymerization ratio of the acidic group-containing monomer in the acrylic polymer is preferably 1.5% by weight or more, more preferably 2.0% by weight or more, still more preferably 2.5% by weight or more, and particularly preferably 3.0% by weight. % or more. In some preferred embodiments, the copolymerization ratio of the acidic group-containing monomer in the acrylic polymer is 4.0% by weight or more, may be more than 5.0% by weight, or may be 6.0% by weight or more. , 6.5% by weight or more. The copolymerization ratio of the acidic group-containing monomer in the acrylic polymer is usually 20% by weight or less, and preferably 10% by weight from the viewpoint of improving the adhesion to the adherend and thus the followability. less than, more preferably less than 8.0 wt%, more preferably less than 7.0 wt%, particularly preferably less than 6.0 wt%, even less than 5.0 wt% (e.g. less than 4.0 wt%) good.
 ここに開示される技術において好ましく用いられるアクリル系ポリマーは、主モノマーとしてのアルキル(メタ)アクリレートと、副モノマーとしての酸性基含有モノマーとが共重合された共重合体であり得る。このようなアクリル系ポリマーにおいて、上記アルキル(メタ)アクリレートおよび上記酸性基含有モノマー以外の共重合成分の割合は10重量%未満であってもよく、3重量%未満でもよく、1重量%未満でもよく、0.1重量%未満でもよく、0.03重量%未満(例えば0.01重量%未満)でもよい。アクリル系ポリマーを構成するモノマー成分は、上記酸性基含有モノマー以外の官能基含有モノマーを実質的に含まないものであり得る。アルキル(メタ)アクリレートと酸性基含有モノマーから実質的に構成されたアクリル系ポリマーによると、アルキル(メタ)アクリレートと酸性基含有モノマーの作用を最大限発揮することができる。 The acrylic polymer preferably used in the technology disclosed herein can be a copolymer obtained by copolymerizing an alkyl (meth)acrylate as a main monomer and an acidic group-containing monomer as a sub-monomer. In such an acrylic polymer, the proportion of copolymer components other than the alkyl (meth)acrylate and the acidic group-containing monomer may be less than 10% by weight, less than 3% by weight, or less than 1% by weight. Well, less than 0.1 wt%, less than 0.03 wt% (eg less than 0.01 wt%). The monomer component constituting the acrylic polymer may be substantially free of functional group-containing monomers other than the above acidic group-containing monomers. An acrylic polymer substantially composed of an alkyl (meth)acrylate and an acidic group-containing monomer can maximize the effects of the alkyl (meth)acrylate and the acidic group-containing monomer.
 あるいは、いくつかの態様において、アクリル系ポリマーを形成するモノマー成分は、上記酸性基含有モノマー以外の官能基含有モノマーとして、例えば水酸基含有モノマーを含んでもよい。上記モノマー成分に占める水酸基含有モノマーの割合は、例えば0.01重量%以上1重量%未満程度とすることができ、0.5重量%未満であってもよく、0.1重量%未満でもよい。 Alternatively, in some embodiments, the monomer component forming the acrylic polymer may contain, for example, a hydroxyl group-containing monomer as a functional group-containing monomer other than the above-mentioned acidic group-containing monomer. The proportion of the hydroxyl group-containing monomer in the monomer component may be, for example, about 0.01% by weight or more and less than 1% by weight, may be less than 0.5% by weight, or may be less than 0.1% by weight. .
 アクリル系ポリマーを構成するモノマー成分は、凝集力向上等の目的で、上述した副モノマー以外の他の共重合成分を含んでいてもよい。他の共重合成分の例としては、酢酸ビニル等のビニルエステル系モノマー;スチレン等の芳香族ビニル化合物;シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロペンチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソボルニル(メタ)アクリレート等のシクロアルキル(メタ)アクリレート;アリール(メタ)アクリレート(例えばフェニル(メタ)アクリレート)、アリールオキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート(例えばフェノキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート)、アリールアルキル(メタ)アクリレート(例えばベンジル(メタ)アクリレート)等の芳香族性環含有(メタ)アクリレート;オレフィン系モノマー;塩素含有モノマー;2-(メタ)アクリロイルオキシエチルイソシアネート等のイソシアネート基含有モノマー;メトキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、エトキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート等のアルコキシ基含有モノマー;メチルビニルエーテル、エチルビニルエーテル等のビニルエーテル系モノマー;等が挙げられる。上記他の共重合成分は、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。 The monomer component that constitutes the acrylic polymer may contain other copolymerization components other than the sub-monomers described above for the purpose of improving the cohesive force. Examples of other copolymerization components include vinyl ester monomers such as vinyl acetate; aromatic vinyl compounds such as styrene; ) acrylate; aryl (meth)acrylate (e.g. phenyl (meth)acrylate), aryloxyalkyl (meth)acrylate (e.g. phenoxyethyl (meth)acrylate), arylalkyl (meth)acrylate (e.g. benzyl (meth)acrylate), etc. Aromatic ring-containing (meth)acrylates; olefinic monomers; chlorine-containing monomers; isocyanate group-containing monomers such as 2-(meth)acryloyloxyethyl isocyanate; alkoxy such as methoxyethyl (meth)acrylate and ethoxyethyl (meth)acrylate group-containing monomers; vinyl ether-based monomers such as methyl vinyl ether and ethyl vinyl ether; The above-mentioned other copolymerization components can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
 かかる他の共重合成分の量は、目的および用途に応じて適宜選択すればよく特に限定されないが、使用による効果を適切に発揮する観点から、0.05重量%以上とすることが適当であり、0.5重量%以上としてもよい。また、粘着性能のバランスをとりやすくする観点から、モノマー成分における他の共重合成分の含有量は、20重量%以下とすることが適当であり、10重量%以下(例えば5重量%以下)としてもよい。ここに開示される技術は、モノマー成分が他の共重合成分を実質的に含まない態様でも好ましく実施され得る。ここで、モノマー成分が他の共重合成分を実質的に含まないとは、少なくとも意図的には他の共重合成分を用いないことをいい、他の共重合成分が例えば0.01重量%以下程度、非意図的に含まれることは許容され得る。 The amount of such other copolymerization components may be appropriately selected according to the purpose and application and is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of appropriately exhibiting the effects of use, it is suitable to be 0.05% by weight or more. , 0.5% by weight or more. In addition, from the viewpoint of easily balancing adhesive performance, the content of other copolymerization components in the monomer component is suitably 20% by weight or less, and 10% by weight or less (for example, 5% by weight or less). good too. The technology disclosed herein can also be preferably practiced in a mode in which the monomer component does not substantially contain other copolymerization components. Here, the monomer component does not substantially contain other copolymerization components means that other copolymerization components are not used at least intentionally, and other copolymerization components are, for example, 0.01 wt% or less. To some extent, unintentional inclusion is acceptable.
 アクリル系ポリマーは、他のモノマー成分として、(メタ)アクリロイル基やビニル基等の不飽和二重結合を有する重合性官能基(典型的にはラジカル重合性官能基)を少なくとも2つ有する多官能モノマーを含んでもよい。モノマー成分として、多官能モノマーを用いることにより、粘着剤層の凝集力を高めることができる。多官能モノマーは、架橋剤として用いることができる。多官能モノマーとしては、特に限定されず、例えば1,6-ヘキサンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。多官能モノマーは、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。 Acrylic polymers are polyfunctional having at least two polymerizable functional groups (typically radically polymerizable functional groups) having unsaturated double bonds such as (meth)acryloyl groups and vinyl groups as other monomer components. It may contain a monomer. By using a polyfunctional monomer as the monomer component, the cohesive force of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer can be increased. Polyfunctional monomers can be used as cross-linking agents. Polyfunctional monomers are not particularly limited, and examples include 1,6-hexanediol di(meth)acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate, and neopentyl glycol di(meth)acrylate. etc. A polyfunctional monomer can be used individually by 1 type or in combination of 2 or more types.
 多官能モノマーの使用量は特に限定されず、該多官能モノマーの使用目的が達成されるように適切に設定することができる。多官能モノマーの使用量は、上記モノマー成分の凡そ3重量%以下とすることができ、凡そ2重量%以下が好ましく、凡そ1重量%以下(例えば凡そ0.5重量%以下)がより好ましい。多官能モノマーを使用する場合における使用量の下限は、0重量%より大きければよく、特に限定されない。通常は、多官能モノマーの使用量をモノマー成分の凡そ0.001重量%以上(例えば凡そ0.01重量%以上)とすることにより、該多官能モノマーの使用効果が適切に発揮され得る。 The amount of polyfunctional monomer used is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set so that the purpose of use of the polyfunctional monomer is achieved. The amount of the polyfunctional monomer used can be approximately 3% by weight or less, preferably approximately 2% by weight or less, and more preferably approximately 1% by weight or less (for example, approximately 0.5% by weight or less) based on the above monomer components. The lower limit of the amount used when using a polyfunctional monomer is not particularly limited as long as it is greater than 0% by weight. Usually, by setting the amount of the polyfunctional monomer used to about 0.001% by weight or more (for example, about 0.01% by weight or more) of the monomer component, the effect of using the polyfunctional monomer can be appropriately exhibited.
 アクリル系ポリマーを構成するモノマー成分の組成は、該アクリル系ポリマーのガラス転移温度(Tg)が凡そ-15℃以下(例えば凡そ-70℃以上-15℃以下)となるように設計されていることが適当である。ここで、アクリル系ポリマーのTgとは、上記モノマー成分の組成に基づいて、Foxの式により求められるTgをいう。Foxの式とは、以下に示すように、共重合体のTgと、該共重合体を構成するモノマーのそれぞれを単独重合したホモポリマーのガラス転移温度Tgiとの関係式である。
   1/Tg=Σ(Wi/Tgi)
 なお、上記Foxの式において、Tgは共重合体のガラス転移温度(単位:K)、Wiは該共重合体におけるモノマーiの重量分率(重量基準の共重合割合)、Tgiはモノマーiのホモポリマーのガラス転移温度(単位:K)を表す。
The composition of the monomer components constituting the acrylic polymer is designed so that the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the acrylic polymer is approximately −15° C. or lower (for example, approximately −70° C. or higher and −15° C. or lower). is appropriate. Here, the Tg of the acrylic polymer refers to the Tg determined by the Fox formula based on the composition of the monomer components. The Fox equation is a relational expression between the Tg of a copolymer and the glass transition temperature Tgi of a homopolymer obtained by homopolymerizing each of the monomers constituting the copolymer, as shown below.
1/Tg=Σ(Wi/Tgi)
In the above Fox formula, Tg is the glass transition temperature of the copolymer (unit: K), Wi is the weight fraction of the monomer i in the copolymer (copolymerization ratio based on weight), and Tgi is the content of the monomer i. It represents the glass transition temperature (unit: K) of a homopolymer.
 Tgの算出に使用するホモポリマーのガラス転移温度としては、公知資料に記載の値を用いるものとする。例えば、以下に挙げるモノマーについては、該モノマーのホモポリマーのガラス転移温度として、以下の値を使用する。
  2-エチルヘキシルアクリレート  -70℃
  n-ブチルアクリレート      -55℃
  2-ヒドロキシエチルアクリレート -15℃
  4-ヒドロキシブチルアクリレート -40℃
  酢酸ビニル             32℃
  アクリル酸            106℃
  メタクリル酸           228℃
As the glass transition temperature of the homopolymer used for calculating the Tg, the value described in the known materials shall be used. For example, for the monomers listed below, the following values are used as the glass transition temperatures of the homopolymers of the monomers.
2-ethylhexyl acrylate -70°C
n-butyl acrylate -55°C
2-hydroxyethyl acrylate -15°C
4-hydroxybutyl acrylate -40°C
Vinyl acetate 32°C
Acrylic acid 106°C
Methacrylic acid 228°C
 上記で例示した以外のモノマーのホモポリマーのガラス転移温度については、「Polymer Handbook」(第3版、John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1989)に記載の数値を用いるものとする。本文献に複数種類の値が記載されているモノマーについては、最も高い値を採用する。上記Polymer Handbookにも記載されていない場合には、日本国特許出願公開2007-51271号公報に記載の測定方法により得られる値を用いるものとする。 For the glass transition temperatures of homopolymers of monomers other than those exemplified above, the numerical values described in "Polymer Handbook" (3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1989) shall be used. For monomers for which multiple values are listed in this document, the highest value is adopted. If it is not described in the above Polymer Handbook, the value obtained by the measurement method described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2007-51271 shall be used.
 特に限定するものではないが、接着性や柔軟性の観点から、アクリル系ポリマーのTgは、凡そ-25℃以下であることが有利であり、好ましくは凡そ-35℃以下、より好ましくは凡そ-40℃以下、さらに好ましくは-45℃以下であり、例えば-50℃以下であってもよく、-55℃以下であってもよい。また、粘着剤層の凝集力の観点から、アクリル系ポリマーのTgは、通常は凡そ-75℃以上であり、好ましくは凡そ-70℃以上である。いくつかの態様において、アクリル系ポリマーのTgは、-60℃以下であってもよく、-62℃以下(例えば-64℃以下)でもよい。また、粘着剤層の凝集力の観点から、アクリル系ポリマーのTgは、凡そ-65℃以上であってもよく、凡そ-60℃以上(例えば、凡そ-55℃以上)でもよい。アクリル系ポリマーのTgは、モノマー組成(すなわち、該ポリマーの合成に使用するモノマーの種類や使用量比)を適宜変えることにより調整することができる。 Although not particularly limited, from the viewpoint of adhesiveness and flexibility, the Tg of the acrylic polymer is advantageously about −25° C. or less, preferably about −35° C. or less, more preferably about − The temperature is 40° C. or lower, more preferably -45° C. or lower, and may be -50° C. or lower, or -55° C. or lower. From the viewpoint of the cohesive strength of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, the Tg of the acrylic polymer is usually about -75°C or higher, preferably about -70°C or higher. In some embodiments, the Tg of the acrylic polymer may be −60° C. or lower, or −62° C. or lower (eg, −64° C. or lower). From the viewpoint of the cohesive strength of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, the Tg of the acrylic polymer may be about −65° C. or higher, or about −60° C. or higher (for example, about −55° C. or higher). The Tg of the acrylic polymer can be adjusted by appropriately changing the monomer composition (that is, the types and usage ratios of the monomers used in synthesizing the polymer).
 ここに開示されるベースポリマーの重量平均分子量Mwは、接着性向上の観点から、好ましくは凡そ30×10以上、より好ましくは40×10以上(例えば45×10以上)、さらに好ましくは凡そ50×10以上、特に好ましくは凡そ55×10以上(例えば凡そ58×10以上)である。また、上記Mwは、通常は凡そ300×10以下であり、凡そ200×10以下が適当である。柔軟性を向上する観点から、上記Mwは、好ましくは凡そ100×10以下であり、凡そ70×10以下(例えば凡そ65×10以下)であってもよい。ベースポリマーとしては、上述のゴム状ポリマーとして例示した各種のポリマーの1種または2種以上を用いることができる。例えば溶液重合法で得られるアクリル系ポリマーでは、上記範囲のMwとすることが好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight Mw of the base polymer disclosed herein is preferably about 30×10 4 or more, more preferably 40×10 4 or more (e.g. 45×10 4 or more), still more preferably It is about 50×10 4 or more, particularly preferably about 55×10 4 or more (for example, about 58×10 4 or more). Moreover, the above Mw is usually about 300×10 4 or less, and about 200×10 4 or less is suitable. From the viewpoint of improving flexibility, Mw is preferably about 100×10 4 or less, and may be about 70×10 4 or less (for example, about 65×10 4 or less). As the base polymer, one or more of the various polymers exemplified as the rubber-like polymer can be used. For example, an acrylic polymer obtained by a solution polymerization method preferably has Mw within the above range.
 ここに開示されるベースポリマー(好適にはアクリル系ポリマー)の分散度(Mw/Mn)は特に限定されない。ここでいう分散度(Mw/Mn)とは、数平均分子量(Mn)に対する重量平均分子量(Mw)の比で表わされる分散度(Mw/Mn)をいう。いくつかの好ましい態様において、ベースポリマーの分散度(Mw/Mn)は50以下であり、45未満であってもよく、40未満(例えば38以下)でもよく、35未満でもよく、32未満でもよい。分子量分布を適切な範囲内に制限することにより、安定した特性が得られやすい。上記Mw/Mnの下限は特に限定されず、例えば3.0以上であってもよく、5.0以上でもよく、7.0以上でもよい。分子量分布をある程度有することで、低分子量体と高分子量体の作用がバランスよく発現する傾向がある。そのようなポリマーは生産性にも優れる傾向がある。 The dispersion (Mw/Mn) of the base polymer (preferably acrylic polymer) disclosed herein is not particularly limited. The dispersity (Mw/Mn) here means the dispersity (Mw/Mn) represented by the ratio of the weight average molecular weight (Mw) to the number average molecular weight (Mn). In some preferred embodiments, the dispersity (Mw/Mn) of the base polymer is 50 or less, may be less than 45, may be less than 40 (e.g., 38 or less), may be less than 35, or may be less than 32. . By restricting the molecular weight distribution within an appropriate range, stable properties can be easily obtained. The lower limit of Mw/Mn is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, 3.0 or more, 5.0 or more, or 7.0 or more. By having a certain degree of molecular weight distribution, there is a tendency for the actions of the low-molecular-weight and high-molecular-weight substances to be exhibited in a well-balanced manner. Such polymers also tend to be highly manufacturable.
 なお、Mw,MnおよびMw/Mnは、重合条件(時間、温度等)や、重合時の不揮発分(モノマー成分)濃度、重合開始剤使用量、連鎖移動剤の使用、連鎖移動定数に基づく重合溶媒の選択等によって調節可能である。また、MwおよびMnは、GPC(ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ)により得られた標準ポリスチレン換算の値から求められる。GPC装置としては、例えば機種名「HLC-8320GPC」(カラム:TSKgelGMH-H(S)、東ソー社製)を用いることができる。 In addition, Mw, Mn and Mw/Mn are polymerization conditions (time, temperature, etc.), non-volatile matter (monomer component) concentration during polymerization, amount of polymerization initiator used, use of chain transfer agent, polymerization based on chain transfer constant It can be adjusted by selecting a solvent or the like. Moreover, Mw and Mn are obtained from values converted to standard polystyrene obtained by GPC (gel permeation chromatography). As the GPC apparatus, for example, model name "HLC-8320GPC" (column: TSKgelGMH-H(S), manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) can be used.
 ベースポリマー(例えばアクリル系ポリマー)を得る方法は特に限定されず、溶液重合法、エマルション重合法、バルク重合法、懸濁重合法、光重合法等の、ポリマーの合成手法として知られている各種の重合方法を適宜採用することができる。例えば、溶液重合法を好ましく採用し得る。溶液重合を行う際の重合温度は、使用するモノマーおよび溶媒の種類、重合開始剤の種類等に応じて適宜選択することができ、例えば20℃~170℃程度(典型的には40℃~140℃程度)とすることができる。 The method for obtaining the base polymer (for example, an acrylic polymer) is not particularly limited, and various known polymer synthesis methods such as solution polymerization, emulsion polymerization, bulk polymerization, suspension polymerization, and photopolymerization can be used. can be appropriately adopted polymerization method. For example, a solution polymerization method can be preferably employed. The polymerization temperature at the time of solution polymerization can be appropriately selected according to the type of monomer and solvent used, the type of polymerization initiator, etc. ° C.).
 溶液重合に用いる溶媒(重合溶媒)は、従来公知の有機溶媒(トルエン、酢酸エチル等)から適宜選択することができる。重合に用いる開始剤は、重合方法の種類に応じて、従来公知の重合開始剤(例えば2,2’-アゾビスイソブチロニトリル(AIBN)等のアゾ系重合開始剤や、過酸化物系開始剤等)から適宜選択することができる。重合開始剤の使用量は、通常の使用量であればよく、例えば、モノマー成分100重量部に対して凡そ0.005~1重量部程度(典型的には凡そ0.01~1重量部程度)の範囲から選択することができる。 The solvent (polymerization solvent) used for solution polymerization can be appropriately selected from conventionally known organic solvents (toluene, ethyl acetate, etc.). Depending on the type of polymerization method, the initiator used for polymerization may be a conventionally known polymerization initiator (for example, an azo polymerization initiator such as 2,2'-azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN) or a peroxide polymerization initiator). initiator, etc.). The amount of the polymerization initiator used may be a normal amount, for example, about 0.005 to 1 part by weight (typically about 0.01 to 1 part by weight) per 100 parts by weight of the monomer component. ).
 (粘着付与樹脂)
 ここに開示される技術における粘着剤層には、粘着付与樹脂を含有させることができる。これにより、粘着シートの剥離強度を高めることができる。粘着付与樹脂としては、フェノール系粘着付与樹脂、テルペン系粘着付与樹脂、変性テルペン系粘着付与樹脂、ロジン系粘着付与樹脂、炭化水素系粘着付与樹脂、エポキシ系粘着付与樹脂、ポリアミド系粘着付与樹脂、エラストマー系粘着付与樹脂、ケトン系粘着付与樹脂等の粘着付与樹脂から選択される1種または2種以上を用いることができる。なかでも、フェノール系粘着付与樹脂、テルペン系粘着付与樹脂、変性テルペン系粘着付与樹脂が好ましく、フェノール系粘着付与樹脂(好適にはテルペンフェノール樹脂)がより好ましい。
(tackifying resin)
The adhesive layer in the technology disclosed herein can contain a tackifying resin. Thereby, the peel strength of the adhesive sheet can be increased. Examples of tackifying resins include phenol-based tackifying resins, terpene-based tackifying resins, modified terpene-based tackifying resins, rosin-based tackifying resins, hydrocarbon-based tackifying resins, epoxy-based tackifying resins, polyamide-based tackifying resins, One or more selected from tackifier resins such as elastomer-based tackifier resins and ketone-based tackifier resins can be used. Among them, phenol-based tackifying resins, terpene-based tackifying resins, and modified terpene-based tackifying resins are preferable, and phenol-based tackifying resins (preferably terpene phenolic resins) are more preferable.
 フェノール系粘着付与樹脂の例には、テルペンフェノール樹脂、水素添加テルペンフェノール樹脂、アルキルフェノール樹脂およびロジンフェノール樹脂が含まれる。
 テルペンフェノール樹脂とは、テルペン残基およびフェノール残基を含むポリマーを指し、テルペン類とフェノール化合物との共重合体(テルペン-フェノール共重合体樹脂)と、テルペン類の単独重合体または共重合体をフェノール変性したもの(フェノール変性テルペン樹脂)との双方を包含する概念である。このようなテルペンフェノール樹脂を構成するテルペン類の好適例としては、α-ピネン、β-ピネン、リモネン(d体、l体およびd/l体(ジペンテン)を包含する。)等のモノテルペン類が挙げられる。水素添加テルペンフェノール樹脂とは、このようなテルペンフェノール樹脂を水素化した構造を有する水素添加テルペンフェノール樹脂をいう。水添テルペンフェノール樹脂と称されることもある。
 アルキルフェノール樹脂は、アルキルフェノールとホルムアルデヒドから得られる樹脂(油性フェノール樹脂)である。アルキルフェノール樹脂の例としては、ノボラックタイプおよびレゾールタイプのものが挙げられる。
 ロジンフェノール樹脂は、典型的には、ロジン類または上記の各種ロジン誘導体(ロジンエステル類、不飽和脂肪酸変性ロジン類および不飽和脂肪酸変性ロジンエステル類を包含する。)のフェノール変性物である。ロジンフェノール樹脂の例には、ロジン類または上記の各種ロジン誘導体にフェノールを酸触媒で付加させ熱重合する方法等により得られるロジンフェノール樹脂が含まれる。
Examples of phenolic tackifying resins include terpene phenolic resins, hydrogenated terpene phenolic resins, alkylphenolic resins and rosin phenolic resins.
Terpene phenol resin refers to a polymer containing a terpene residue and a phenol residue, a copolymer of terpenes and a phenol compound (terpene-phenol copolymer resin), and a homopolymer or copolymer of terpenes is a concept that includes both phenol-modified (phenol-modified terpene resin). Preferred examples of terpenes constituting such a terpene phenol resin include monoterpenes such as α-pinene, β-pinene, and limonene (including d-, l- and d/l-forms (dipentene)). is mentioned. A hydrogenated terpene phenol resin refers to a hydrogenated terpene phenol resin having a structure obtained by hydrogenating such a terpene phenol resin. It is sometimes called a hydrogenated terpene phenolic resin.
Alkylphenol resins are resins obtained from alkylphenols and formaldehyde (oily phenolic resins). Examples of alkylphenol resins include novolac and resole types.
Rosin phenolic resins are typically rosins or phenol-modified products of the various rosin derivatives described above (including rosin esters, unsaturated fatty acid-modified rosins, and unsaturated fatty acid-modified rosin esters). Examples of rosin phenol resins include rosin phenol resins obtained by a method of adding phenol to rosins or various rosin derivatives described above with an acid catalyst and thermally polymerizing the mixture.
 テルペン系粘着付与樹脂の例には、α-ピネン、β-ピネン、d-リモネン、l-リモネン、ジペンテン等のテルペン類(典型的にはモノテルペン類)の重合体が含まれる。1種のテルペン類の単独重合体であってもよく、2種以上のテルペン類の共重合体であってもよい。1種のテルペン類の単独重合体としては、α-ピネン重合体、β-ピネン重合体、ジペンテン重合体等が挙げられる。変性テルペン樹脂の例としては、上記テルペン樹脂を変性したものが挙げられる。具体的には、スチレン変性テルペン樹脂、水素添加テルペン樹脂等が例示される。 Examples of terpene-based tackifying resins include polymers of terpenes (typically monoterpenes) such as α-pinene, β-pinene, d-limonene, l-limonene and dipentene. It may be a homopolymer of one kind of terpenes, or a copolymer of two or more kinds of terpenes. One type of terpene homopolymer includes α-pinene polymer, β-pinene polymer, dipentene polymer and the like. Examples of modified terpene resins include those obtained by modifying the above terpene resins. Specific examples include styrene-modified terpene resins and hydrogenated terpene resins.
 ここでいうロジン系粘着付与樹脂の概念には、ロジン類およびロジン誘導体樹脂の双方が包含される。ロジン類の例には、ガムロジン、ウッドロジン、トール油ロジン等の未変性ロジン(生ロジン);これらの未変性ロジンを水素添加、不均化、重合等により変性した変性ロジン(水素添加ロジン、不均化ロジン、重合ロジン、その他の化学的に修飾されたロジン等);が含まれる。 The concept of rosin-based tackifying resins here includes both rosins and rosin derivative resins. Examples of rosins include unmodified rosins (fresh rosins) such as gum rosin, wood rosin and tall oil rosin; homogenized rosin, polymerized rosin, other chemically modified rosins, etc.);
 ロジン誘導体樹脂は、典型的には上記のようなロジン類の誘導体である。ここでいうロジン系樹脂の概念には、未変性ロジンの誘導体および変性ロジン(水素添加ロジン、不均化ロジンおよび重合ロジンを包含する。)の誘導体が包含される。例えば、未変性ロジンとアルコール類とのエステルである未変性ロジンエステルや、変性ロジンとアルコール類とのエステルである変性ロジンエステル等のロジンエステル類;例えば、ロジン類を不飽和脂肪酸で変性した不飽和脂肪酸変性ロジン類;例えば、ロジンエステル類を不飽和脂肪酸で変性した不飽和脂肪酸変性ロジンエステル類;例えば、ロジン類または上記の各種ロジン誘導体(ロジンエステル類、不飽和脂肪酸変性ロジン類および不飽和脂肪酸変性ロジンエステル類を包含する。)のカルボキシ基を還元処理したロジンアルコール類;例えば、ロジン類または上記の各種ロジン誘導体の金属塩;等が挙げられる。ロジンエステル類の具体例としては、未変性ロジンまたは変性ロジン(水素添加ロジン、不均化ロジン、重合ロジン等)のメチルエステル、トリエチレングリコールエステル、グリセリンエステル、ペンタエリスリトールエステル等が挙げられる。 The rosin derivative resin is typically a derivative of the above rosins. The term "rosin-based resin" as used herein includes derivatives of unmodified rosin and derivatives of modified rosin (including hydrogenated rosin, disproportionated rosin and polymerized rosin). For example, rosin esters such as undenatured rosin esters, which are esters of undenatured rosin and alcohols, and denatured rosin esters, which are esters of denatured rosin and alcohols; Saturated fatty acid-modified rosins; for example, unsaturated fatty acid-modified rosin esters obtained by modifying rosin esters with unsaturated fatty acids; rosin alcohols obtained by reducing the carboxy group of rosin esters modified with fatty acids; for example, rosins or metal salts of the various rosin derivatives described above; Specific examples of rosin esters include methyl esters, triethylene glycol esters, glycerin esters and pentaerythritol esters of unmodified rosins or modified rosins (hydrogenated rosins, disproportionated rosins, polymerized rosins, etc.).
 炭化水素系粘着付与樹脂の例としては、脂肪族系炭化水素樹脂、芳香族系炭化水素樹脂、脂肪族系環状炭化水素樹脂、脂肪族・芳香族系石油樹脂(スチレン-オレフィン系共重合体等)、脂肪族・脂環族系石油樹脂、水素添加炭化水素樹脂、クマロン系樹脂、クマロンインデン系樹脂等の各種の炭化水素系の樹脂が挙げられる。 Examples of hydrocarbon tackifying resins include aliphatic hydrocarbon resins, aromatic hydrocarbon resins, aliphatic cyclic hydrocarbon resins, aliphatic/aromatic petroleum resins (styrene-olefin copolymers, etc. ), aliphatic/alicyclic petroleum resins, hydrogenated hydrocarbon resins, coumarone-based resins, and coumarone-indene-based resins.
 粘着付与樹脂の軟化点は特に限定されない。凝集力向上の観点から、軟化点(軟化温度)が凡そ80℃以上(好ましくは凡そ100℃以上)である粘着付与樹脂を好ましく採用し得る。例えば、このような軟化点を有するフェノール系粘着付与樹脂(テルペンフェノール樹脂等)を好ましく用いることができる。いくつかの態様において、軟化点が凡そ135℃以上(さらには凡そ140℃以上)のテルペンフェノール樹脂を用いることができる。粘着付与樹脂の軟化点の上限は特に制限されない。被着体や基材に対する密着性の観点から、軟化点が凡そ200℃以下(より好ましくは凡そ180℃以下)の粘着付与樹脂を好ましく使用し得る。なお、粘着付与樹脂の軟化点は、JIS K2207に規定する軟化点試験方法(環球法)に基づいて測定することができる。 The softening point of the tackifying resin is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of improving cohesive strength, a tackifier resin having a softening point (softening temperature) of about 80° C. or higher (preferably about 100° C. or higher) can be preferably used. For example, a phenol-based tackifying resin (terpene phenol resin, etc.) having such a softening point can be preferably used. In some embodiments, terpene phenolic resins with softening points of about 135° C. or higher (or even about 140° C. or higher) can be used. There is no particular upper limit for the softening point of the tackifying resin. A tackifying resin having a softening point of about 200° C. or lower (more preferably about 180° C. or lower) can be preferably used from the viewpoint of adhesion to adherends and substrates. The softening point of the tackifying resin can be measured based on the softening point test method (ring and ball method) specified in JIS K2207.
 いくつかの好ましい態様として、上記粘着付与樹脂が1種または2種以上のフェノール系粘着付与樹脂(典型的にはテルペンフェノール樹脂)を含む態様が挙げられる。ここに開示される技術は、例えば、粘着付与樹脂の総量を100重量%として、そのうち凡そ25重量%以上(より好ましくは凡そ30重量%以上)がテルペンフェノール樹脂である態様で好ましく実施され得る。粘着付与樹脂の総量の凡そ50重量%以上がテルペンフェノール樹脂であってもよく、凡そ70重量%以上(例えば凡そ80重量%以上)がテルペンフェノール樹脂であってもよい。粘着付与樹脂の実質的に全部(例えば凡そ95~100重量%、さらには凡そ99~100重量%)がテルペンフェノール樹脂であってもよい。 Some preferred embodiments include embodiments in which the tackifying resin contains one or more phenolic tackifying resins (typically terpene phenolic resins). The technology disclosed herein can be preferably implemented in a mode in which, for example, about 25% by weight or more (more preferably about 30% by weight or more) of the total amount of tackifying resin is 100% by weight is a terpene phenol resin. About 50% by weight or more of the total amount of tackifying resin may be the terpene phenolic resin, and about 70% by weight or more (eg, about 80% by weight or more) may be the terpene phenolic resin. Substantially all of the tackifying resin (eg, about 95-100 wt%, or even about 99-100 wt%) may be a terpene phenolic resin.
 特に限定するものではないが、いくつかの態様において、上記粘着付与樹脂は、水酸基価が20mgKOH/gよりも高い粘着付与樹脂を含み得る。なかでも水酸基価が30mgKOH/g以上の粘着付与樹脂が好ましい。以下、水酸基価が30mgKOH/g以上の粘着付与樹脂を「高水酸基価樹脂」ということがある。このような高水酸基価樹脂(例えばフェノール系粘着付与樹脂、好ましくはテルペンフェノール樹脂)を含む粘着付与樹脂によると、被着体に対する密着性に優れ、かつ凝集力の高い粘着剤層が実現され得る。高水酸基価樹脂の水酸基価の上限は特に限定されない。ベースポリマーとの相溶性等の観点から、高水酸基価樹脂の水酸基価は、凡そ200mgKOH/g以下が適当であり、好ましくは凡そ100mgKOH/g以下であり、凡そ70mgKOH/g以下であってもよく、凡そ65mgKOH/g以下でもよい。高水酸基価樹脂は、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。 Although not particularly limited, in some embodiments, the tackifying resin may include a tackifying resin having a hydroxyl value higher than 20 mgKOH/g. Among them, a tackifying resin having a hydroxyl value of 30 mgKOH/g or more is preferable. Hereinafter, a tackifying resin having a hydroxyl value of 30 mgKOH/g or more may be referred to as a "high hydroxyl value resin". A tackifying resin containing such a high hydroxyl value resin (e.g., a phenolic tackifying resin, preferably a terpene phenolic resin) can provide a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer with excellent adhesion to adherends and high cohesion. . The upper limit of the hydroxyl value of the high hydroxyl value resin is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of compatibility with the base polymer, the hydroxyl value of the high hydroxyl value resin is suitably about 200 mgKOH/g or less, preferably about 100 mgKOH/g or less, and may be about 70 mgKOH/g or less. , approximately 65 mg KOH/g or less. High hydroxyl value resin can be used individually by 1 type or in combination of 2 or more types.
 ここで、上記水酸基価の値としては、JIS K0070:1992に規定する電位差滴定法により測定される値を採用することができる。具体的な測定方法は以下に示すとおりである。
  [水酸基価の測定方法]
1.試薬
(1)アセチル化試薬としては、無水酢酸約12.5g(約11.8mL)を取り、これにピリジンを加えて全量を50mLにし、充分に攪拌したものを使用する。または、無水酢酸約25g(約23.5mL)を取り、これにピリジンを加えて全量を100mLにし、充分に攪拌したものを使用する。
(2)測定試薬としては、0.5mol/L水酸化カリウムエタノール溶液を使用する。
(3)その他、トルエン、ピリジン、エタノールおよび蒸留水を準備する。
2.操作
(1)平底フラスコに試料約2gを精秤採取し、アセチル化試薬5mLおよびピリジン10mLを加え、空気冷却管を装着する。
(2)上記フラスコを100℃の浴中で70分間加熱した後、放冷し、冷却管の上部から溶剤としてトルエン35mLを加えて攪拌した後、蒸留水1mLを加えて攪拌することにより無水酢酸を分解する。分解を完全にするため再度浴中で10分間加熱し、放冷する。
(3)エタノール5mLで冷却管を洗い、取り外す。次いで、溶剤としてピリジン50mLを加えて攪拌する。
(4)0.5mol/L水酸化カリウムエタノール溶液を、ホールピペットを用いて25mL加える。
(5)0.5mol/L水酸化カリウムエタノール溶液で電位差滴定を行う。得られた滴定曲線の変曲点を終点とする。
(6)空試験は、試料を入れないで上記(1)~(5)を行う。
3.計算
 以下の式により水酸基価を算出する。
   水酸基価(mgKOH/g)=[(B-C)×f×28.05]/S+D
 ここで、
 B: 空試験に用いた0.5mol/L水酸化カリウムエタノール溶液の量(mL)、
 C: 試料に用いた0.5mol/L水酸化カリウムエタノール溶液の量(mL)、
 f: 0.5mol/L水酸化カリウムエタノール溶液のファクター、
 S: 試料の重量(g)、
 D: 酸価、
 28.05: 水酸化カリウムの分子量56.11の1/2、
である。
Here, as the value of the hydroxyl value, a value measured by a potentiometric titration method specified in JIS K0070:1992 can be adopted. A specific measuring method is as follows.
[Method for measuring hydroxyl value]
1. Reagent (1) As the acetylation reagent, approximately 12.5 g (approximately 11.8 mL) of acetic anhydride is taken, pyridine is added to bring the total amount to 50 mL, and the mixture is thoroughly stirred and used. Alternatively, take about 25 g (about 23.5 mL) of acetic anhydride, add pyridine to bring the total amount to 100 mL, and use the mixture after thorough stirring.
(2) A 0.5 mol/L potassium hydroxide ethanol solution is used as a measurement reagent.
(3) In addition, prepare toluene, pyridine, ethanol and distilled water.
2. Operation (1) About 2 g of a sample is accurately weighed and collected in a flat-bottomed flask, 5 mL of an acetylation reagent and 10 mL of pyridine are added, and an air cooling tube is attached.
(2) After heating the flask in a bath at 100°C for 70 minutes, allowing it to cool, adding 35 mL of toluene as a solvent from the top of the cooling tube and stirring, then adding 1 mL of distilled water and stirring to obtain acetic anhydride. decompose. Heat again in the bath for 10 minutes for complete decomposition and allow to cool.
(3) Wash the cooling tube with 5 mL of ethanol and remove. Then, 50 mL of pyridine is added as a solvent and stirred.
(4) Add 25 mL of 0.5 mol/L potassium hydroxide ethanol solution using a whole pipette.
(5) Perform potentiometric titration with 0.5 mol/L potassium hydroxide ethanol solution. The inflection point of the obtained titration curve is taken as the end point.
(6) In the blank test, the above (1) to (5) are performed without any sample.
3. Calculation Calculate the hydroxyl value by the following formula.
Hydroxyl value (mgKOH/g) = [(BC) x f x 28.05]/S + D
here,
B: Amount (mL) of 0.5 mol/L potassium hydroxide ethanol solution used in the blank test,
C: Amount (mL) of 0.5 mol/L potassium hydroxide ethanol solution used for the sample,
f: factor of 0.5 mol/L potassium hydroxide ethanol solution,
S: weight of sample (g),
D: acid value,
28.05: ½ of the molecular weight of potassium hydroxide, 56.11;
is.
 粘着剤層が粘着付与樹脂を含む場合において、該粘着付与樹脂の使用量(総量)は特に限定されず、例えばベースポリマー100重量部に対して1~100重量部程度の範囲で適宜設定し得る。剥離強度を向上させる効果を好適に発揮する観点から、ベースポリマー(例えばアクリル系ポリマー)100重量部に対する粘着付与樹脂の使用量は、5重量部以上とすることが適当であり、10重量部以上とすることが好ましく、15重量部以上としてもよい。また、耐衝撃性、凝集力の観点から、ベースポリマー(例えばアクリル系ポリマー)100重量部に対する粘着付与樹脂の使用量は、50重量部以下とすることが適当であり、40重量部以下としてもよく、30重量部以下としてもよい。 When the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer contains a tackifying resin, the amount (total amount) of the tackifying resin used is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set, for example, in the range of about 1 to 100 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. . From the viewpoint of suitably exhibiting the effect of improving the peel strength, the amount of the tackifying resin to be used with respect to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer (for example, an acrylic polymer) is suitably 5 parts by weight or more, and 10 parts by weight or more. , and may be 15 parts by weight or more. From the viewpoint of impact resistance and cohesive strength, the amount of tackifying resin to be used with respect to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer (for example, an acrylic polymer) is preferably 50 parts by weight or less, and may be 40 parts by weight or less. Well, it may be 30 parts by weight or less.
 (架橋剤)
 ここに開示される技術において、粘着剤層の形成に用いられる粘着剤組成物は、必要に応じて架橋剤を含んでもよい。架橋剤の種類は特に制限されず、従来公知の架橋剤から適宜選択して用いることができる。そのような架橋剤としては、例えば、イソシアネート系架橋剤、エポキシ系架橋剤、オキサゾリン系架橋剤、アジリジン系架橋剤、メラミン系架橋剤、過酸化物系架橋剤、尿素系架橋剤、金属アルコキシド系架橋剤、金属キレート系架橋剤、金属塩系架橋剤、カルボジイミド系架橋剤、ヒドラジン系架橋剤、アミン系架橋剤、シランカップリング剤等が挙げられる。なかでも、イソシアネート系架橋剤、エポキシ系架橋剤、オキサゾリン系架橋剤、アジリジン系架橋剤、メラミン系架橋剤が好ましく、イソシアネート系架橋剤、エポキシ系架橋剤がより好ましく、イソシアネート系架橋剤が特に好ましい。架橋剤を適切に選定して使用することにより、粘着剤層の凝集力を得て、被着体への追従性や接着力等を改善することができる。なお、ここに開示される技術における粘着剤層は、上記架橋剤を、架橋反応後の形態、架橋反応前の形態、部分的に架橋反応した形態、これらの中間的または複合的な形態等で含有し得る。上記架橋剤は、典型的には、専ら架橋反応後の形態で粘着剤層に含まれている。
(crosslinking agent)
In the technique disclosed here, the adhesive composition used for forming the adhesive layer may contain a cross-linking agent as needed. The type of cross-linking agent is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately selected from conventionally known cross-linking agents. Examples of such cross-linking agents include isocyanate-based cross-linking agents, epoxy-based cross-linking agents, oxazoline-based cross-linking agents, aziridine-based cross-linking agents, melamine-based cross-linking agents, peroxide-based cross-linking agents, urea-based cross-linking agents, and metal alkoxide-based cross-linking agents. Cross-linking agents, metal chelate-based cross-linking agents, metal salt-based cross-linking agents, carbodiimide-based cross-linking agents, hydrazine-based cross-linking agents, amine-based cross-linking agents, silane coupling agents, and the like. Among them, isocyanate-based cross-linking agents, epoxy-based cross-linking agents, oxazoline-based cross-linking agents, aziridine-based cross-linking agents, and melamine-based cross-linking agents are preferable, isocyanate-based cross-linking agents and epoxy-based cross-linking agents are more preferable, and isocyanate-based cross-linking agents are particularly preferable. . By appropriately selecting and using a cross-linking agent, the cohesive force of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer can be obtained, and the conformability to the adherend, adhesive force, and the like can be improved. The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer in the technology disclosed herein contains the cross-linking agent in the form after the cross-linking reaction, the form before the cross-linking reaction, the form after the cross-linking reaction, the intermediate or composite form thereof, and the like. can contain The cross-linking agent is typically contained in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer exclusively in the form after the cross-linking reaction.
 イソシアネート系架橋剤としては、多官能イソシアネート(1分子当たり平均2個以上のイソシアネート基を有する化合物をいい、イソシアヌレート構造を有するものを包含する。)が好ましく使用され得る。イソシアネート系架橋剤は、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。 As the isocyanate-based cross-linking agent, a polyfunctional isocyanate (meaning a compound having an average of two or more isocyanate groups per molecule, including those having an isocyanurate structure) can be preferably used. The isocyanate-based cross-linking agents may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
 多官能イソシアネートの例として、脂肪族ポリイソシアネート類、脂環族ポリイソシアネート類、芳香族ポリイソシアネート類等が挙げられる。
 脂肪族ポリイソシアネート類の具体例としては、1,2-エチレンジイソシアネート;1,2-テトラメチレンジイソシアネート、1,3-テトラメチレンジイソシアネート、1,4-テトラメチレンジイソシアネート等のテトラメチレンジイソシアネート;1,2-ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート、1,3-ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート、1,4-ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート、1,5-ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート、1,6-ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート、2,5-ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート等のヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート;2-メチル-1,5-ペンタンジイソシアネート、3-メチル-1,5-ペンタンジイソシアネート、リジンジイソシアネート等が挙げられる。
Examples of polyfunctional isocyanates include aliphatic polyisocyanates, alicyclic polyisocyanates, and aromatic polyisocyanates.
Specific examples of aliphatic polyisocyanates include 1,2-ethylene diisocyanate; tetramethylene diisocyanates such as 1,2-tetramethylene diisocyanate, 1,3-tetramethylene diisocyanate and 1,4-tetramethylene diisocyanate; - hexamethylene diisocyanates such as hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,3-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,4-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,5-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,6-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 2,5-hexamethylene diisocyanate; 2-methyl-1,5-pentane diisocyanate, 3-methyl-1,5-pentane diisocyanate, lysine diisocyanate and the like.
 脂環族ポリイソシアネート類の具体例としては、イソホロンジイソシアネート;1,2-シクロヘキシルジイソシアネート、1,3-シクロヘキシルジイソシアネート、1,4-シクロヘキシルジイソシアネート等のシクロヘキシルジイソシアネート;1,2-シクロペンチルジイソシアネート、1,3-シクロペンチルジイソシアネート等のシクロペンチルジイソシアネート;水素添加キシリレンジイソシアネート、水素添加トリレンジイソシアネート、水素添加ジフェニルメタンジイソシアネート、水素添加テトラメチルキシレンジイソシアネート、4,4’-ジシクロヘキシルメタンジイソシアネート等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of alicyclic polyisocyanates include isophorone diisocyanate; cyclohexyl diisocyanates such as 1,2-cyclohexyl diisocyanate, 1,3-cyclohexyl diisocyanate and 1,4-cyclohexyl diisocyanate; 1,2-cyclopentyl diisocyanate, 1,3 - cyclopentyl diisocyanate such as cyclopentyl diisocyanate; hydrogenated xylylene diisocyanate, hydrogenated tolylene diisocyanate, hydrogenated diphenylmethane diisocyanate, hydrogenated tetramethylxylene diisocyanate, 4,4'-dicyclohexylmethane diisocyanate and the like.
 芳香族ポリイソシアネート類の具体例としては、2,4-トリレンジイソシアネート、2,6-トリレンジイソシアネート、4,4’-ジフェニルメタンジイソシアネート、2,4’-ジフェニルメタンジイソシアネート、2,2’-ジフェニルメタンジイソシアネート、4,4’-ジフェニルエーテルジイソシアネート、2-ニトロジフェニル-4,4’-ジイソシアネート、2,2’-ジフェニルプロパン-4,4’-ジイソシアネート、3,3’-ジメチルジフェニルメタン-4,4’-ジイソシアネート、4,4’-ジフェニルプロパンジイソシアネート、m-フェニレンジイソシアネート、p-フェニレンジイソシアネート、ナフチレン-1,4-ジイソシアネート、ナフチレン-1,5-ジイソシアネート、3,3’-ジメトキシジフェニル-4,4’-ジイソシアネート、キシリレン-1,4-ジイソシアネート、キシリレン-1,3-ジイソシアネート等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of aromatic polyisocyanates include 2,4-tolylene diisocyanate, 2,6-tolylene diisocyanate, 4,4'-diphenylmethane diisocyanate, 2,4'-diphenylmethane diisocyanate, and 2,2'-diphenylmethane diisocyanate. , 4,4′-diphenyl ether diisocyanate, 2-nitrodiphenyl-4,4′-diisocyanate, 2,2′-diphenylpropane-4,4′-diisocyanate, 3,3′-dimethyldiphenylmethane-4,4′-diisocyanate , 4,4′-diphenylpropane diisocyanate, m-phenylene diisocyanate, p-phenylene diisocyanate, naphthylene-1,4-diisocyanate, naphthylene-1,5-diisocyanate, 3,3′-dimethoxydiphenyl-4,4′-diisocyanate , xylylene-1,4-diisocyanate, xylylene-1,3-diisocyanate, and the like.
 好ましい多官能イソシアネートとして、1分子当たり平均して3個以上のイソシアネート基を有する多官能イソシアネートが例示される。かかる3官能以上のイソシアネートは、2官能または3官能以上のイソシアネートの多量体(典型的には2量体または3量体)、誘導体(例えば、多価アルコールと2分子以上の多官能イソシアネートとの付加反応生成物)、重合物等であり得る。例えば、ジフェニルメタンジイソシアネートの2量体や3量体、ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネートのイソシアヌレート体(イソシアヌレート構造の3量体付加物)、トリメチロールプロパンとトリレンジイソシアネートとの反応生成物、トリメチロールプロパンとヘキサメチレンジイソシアネートとの反応生成物、ポリメチレンポリフェニルイソシアネート、ポリエーテルポリイソシアネート、ポリエステルポリイソシアネート等の多官能イソシアネートが挙げられる。かかる多官能イソシアネートの市販品としては、旭化成ケミカルズ社製の商品名「デュラネートTPA-100」、東ソー社製の商品名「コロネートL」、同「コロネートHL」、同「コロネートHK」、同「コロネートHX」、同「コロネート2096」等が挙げられる。 Examples of preferred polyfunctional isocyanates include polyfunctional isocyanates having an average of 3 or more isocyanate groups per molecule. Such tri- or more functional isocyanates are polymers (typically dimers or trimers) of di- or tri- or more functional isocyanates, derivatives (for example, polyhydric alcohols and two or more molecules of polyfunctional isocyanates). addition reaction products), polymers, and the like. For example, dimers and trimers of diphenylmethane diisocyanate, isocyanurate of hexamethylene diisocyanate (trimer adduct of isocyanurate structure), reaction products of trimethylolpropane and tolylene diisocyanate, trimethylolpropane and hexa Polyfunctional isocyanates such as reaction products with methylene diisocyanate, polymethylene polyphenyl isocyanate, polyether polyisocyanate and polyester polyisocyanate can be mentioned. Commercially available polyfunctional isocyanates include "Duranate TPA-100" (trade name) manufactured by Asahi Kasei Chemicals, "Coronate L" (trade name), "Coronate HL", "Coronate HK" (trade name) and "Coronate HK" (trade names) manufactured by Tosoh Corporation. HX", "Coronate 2096", and the like.
 イソシアネート系架橋剤の使用量は特に限定されない。例えば、ベースポリマー100重量部に対して、凡そ0.1重量部以上とすることができる。凝集力と密着性との両立や耐衝撃性等の観点から、ベースポリマー100重量部に対するイソシアネート系架橋剤の使用量は、例えば0.3重量部超とすることができ、好ましくは0.5重量部以上、より好ましくは0.75重量部以上、さらに好ましくは1.0重量部以上(例えば1.2重量部以上)である。一方、被着体に対する密着性向上や追従性向上の観点から、上記イソシアネート系架橋剤の使用量は、ベースポリマー100重量部に対して10重量部以下とすることが適当であり、好ましくは7重量部未満、より好ましくは5重量部未満、さらに好ましくは4.5重量部未満、特に好ましくは4重量部未満である。 The amount of the isocyanate-based cross-linking agent used is not particularly limited. For example, it can be about 0.1 part by weight or more with respect to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. From the viewpoint of compatibility between cohesive strength and adhesion, impact resistance, etc., the amount of the isocyanate-based cross-linking agent used relative to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer can be, for example, more than 0.3 parts by weight, preferably 0.5 parts by weight. It is at least 0.75 parts by weight, more preferably at least 1.0 parts by weight (for example, at least 1.2 parts by weight). On the other hand, from the viewpoint of improving the adhesion to the adherend and the followability, the amount of the isocyanate-based cross-linking agent used is appropriately 10 parts by weight or less, preferably 7 parts by weight, per 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. Less than 5 parts by weight, more preferably less than 4.5 parts by weight, particularly preferably less than 4 parts by weight.
 いくつかの好ましい態様では、架橋剤として、イソシアネート系架橋剤と、該イソシアネート系架橋剤とは架橋性官能基の種類が異なる少なくとも一種の架橋剤とが組み合わせて用いられる。ここに開示される技術において、イソシアネート系架橋剤以外の架橋剤(すなわち、イソシアネート系架橋剤とは架橋性反応基の種類の異なる架橋剤。以下「非イソシアネート系架橋剤」ともいう。)とイソシアネート系架橋剤とを組み合わせて用いることができる。 In some preferred embodiments, an isocyanate-based cross-linking agent and at least one cross-linking agent having a different type of cross-linkable functional group from the isocyanate-based cross-linking agent are used in combination as the cross-linking agent. In the technology disclosed herein, a cross-linking agent other than an isocyanate-based cross-linking agent (that is, a cross-linking agent having a different type of cross-linkable reactive group from the isocyanate-based cross-linking agent; hereinafter also referred to as a “non-isocyanate cross-linking agent”) and an isocyanate It can be used in combination with a system cross-linking agent.
 イソシアネート系架橋剤と組み合わせて用いられ得る非イソシアネート系架橋剤の種類は特に制限されず、上述の架橋剤から適宜選択して用いることができる。非イソシアネート系架橋剤は、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。 The type of non-isocyanate-based cross-linking agent that can be used in combination with the isocyanate-based cross-linking agent is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately selected from the above-described cross-linking agents. The non-isocyanate-based cross-linking agents may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
 いくつかの好ましい態様において、非イソシアネート系架橋剤としてエポキシ系架橋剤を採用することができる。例えば、イソシアネート系架橋剤とエポキシ系架橋剤とを併用することにより、凝集性と耐衝撃性とを両立しやすい。エポキシ系架橋剤としては、1分子中に2個以上のエポキシ基を有する化合物を特に制限なく用いることができる。1分子中に3~5個のエポキシ基を有するエポキシ系架橋剤が好ましい。エポキシ系架橋剤は、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。 In some preferred embodiments, an epoxy-based cross-linking agent can be employed as the non-isocyanate-based cross-linking agent. For example, by using an isocyanate-based cross-linking agent and an epoxy-based cross-linking agent in combination, it is easy to achieve both cohesiveness and impact resistance. As the epoxy-based cross-linking agent, a compound having two or more epoxy groups in one molecule can be used without particular limitation. An epoxy-based cross-linking agent having 3 to 5 epoxy groups in one molecule is preferred. Epoxy-based cross-linking agents may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
 特に限定するものではないが、エポキシ系架橋剤の具体例として、例えばN,N,N’,N’-テトラグリシジル-m-キシレンジアミン、1,3-ビス(N,N-ジグリシジルアミノメチル)シクロヘキサン、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジグリシジルエーテル、ポリエチレングリコールジグリシジルエーテル、ポリグリセロールポリグリシジルエーテル等が挙げられる。エポキシ系架橋剤の市販品としては、三菱瓦斯化学社製の商品名「TETRAD-C」および商品名「TETRAD-X」、DIC社製の商品名「エピクロンCR-5L」、ナガセケムテックス社製の商品名「デナコールEX-512」、日産化学工業社製の商品名「TEPIC-G」等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of epoxy-based cross-linking agents include, but are not limited to, N,N,N',N'-tetraglycidyl-m-xylenediamine, 1,3-bis(N,N-diglycidylaminomethyl ) cyclohexane, 1,6-hexanediol diglycidyl ether, polyethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, polyglycerol polyglycidyl ether and the like. Commercially available epoxy-based cross-linking agents include Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Co., Ltd.'s trade name "TETRAD-C" and trade name "TETRAD-X", DIC's trade name "Epiclon CR-5L", and Nagase ChemteX Corp. and "TEPIC-G" manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd. under the trade name of "Denacol EX-512".
 エポキシ系架橋剤の使用量は特に限定されない。エポキシ系架橋剤の使用量は、例えば、ベースポリマー100重量部に対して、0重量部を超えて凡そ1重量部以下(典型的には凡そ0.001~0.5重量部)とすることができる。凝集力の向上効果を好適に発揮する観点から、エポキシ系架橋剤の使用量は、ベースポリマー100重量部に対して凡そ0.005重量部以上とすることが好ましい。また、被着体に対する密着性向上や追従性向上の観点から、エポキシ系架橋剤の使用量は、ベースポリマー100重量部に対して凡そ0.2重量部以下とすることが適当であり、凡そ0.1重量部以下とすることが好ましく、凡そ0.05重量部未満がより好ましい。 The amount of epoxy-based cross-linking agent used is not particularly limited. The amount of the epoxy-based cross-linking agent used is, for example, more than 0 parts by weight and about 1 part by weight or less (typically about 0.001 to 0.5 parts by weight) with respect to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. can be done. From the viewpoint of suitably exhibiting the effect of improving the cohesive strength, the amount of the epoxy-based cross-linking agent to be used is preferably about 0.005 parts by weight or more per 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. In addition, from the viewpoint of improving the adhesion to the adherend and the followability, the amount of the epoxy-based cross-linking agent used is appropriately about 0.2 parts by weight or less with respect to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. It is preferably 0.1 part by weight or less, more preferably less than about 0.05 part by weight.
 架橋剤の総使用量(総量)は特に制限されない。例えば、ベースポリマー(好適にはアクリル系ポリマー)100重量部に対して凡そ10重量部以下とすることができ、好ましくは凡そ0.005~10重量部、より好ましくは凡そ0.01~5重量部の範囲から選択することができる。 The total amount (total amount) of the cross-linking agent used is not particularly limited. For example, it can be about 10 parts by weight or less, preferably about 0.005 to 10 parts by weight, more preferably about 0.01 to 5 parts by weight, based on 100 parts by weight of the base polymer (preferably acrylic polymer). can be selected from a range of
 (着色剤)
 ここに開示される粘着剤層は、光透過性低減に役立ち得る着色剤を含有してもよく、上記着色剤を含有しなくてもよい。着色剤としては、従来公知の顔料や染料を用いることができる。着色剤の色としては有色が好ましい。着色剤の色は、例えば、黒色、灰色、赤色、青色、黄色、緑色、黄緑色、橙色、紫色、金色、銀色、パール色等であり得る。有色系着色剤は、遮光性、意匠性を付与させ得る。着色剤は、有色系着色剤と組み合わせるかたちで無色系着色剤を含んでもよく、含まなくてもよい。ここに開示される典型的な一態様に係る粘着剤層は、無色系着色剤を実質的に含まないものであり得る。なお、本明細書において「有色」とは黒色や金属色を含む意味である。また、「無色」とは白色を含む意味である。粘着剤層は、着色剤を含有する着色層を含む多層構造を有していてもよい。あるいは、粘着剤層は着色剤を実質的に分散状態(溶解した状態であり得る。)で含むものであってもよい。
(coloring agent)
The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disclosed herein may or may not contain a coloring agent that can help reduce light transmittance. Conventionally known pigments and dyes can be used as the colorant. As the color of the coloring agent, colored is preferable. The color of the coloring agent can be, for example, black, gray, red, blue, yellow, green, yellow-green, orange, purple, gold, silver, pearlescent, and the like. A colored coloring agent can impart light-shielding properties and design properties. The coloring agent may or may not contain a colorless coloring agent in combination with a colored coloring agent. The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer according to one typical aspect disclosed herein may be substantially free of colorless coloring agents. In addition, in this specification, "colored" is a meaning including black and metallic color. In addition, the term “colorless” is meant to include white. The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may have a multilayer structure including a colored layer containing a coloring agent. Alternatively, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may contain the colorant in a substantially dispersed state (it may be in a dissolved state).
 着色剤としては、各種の顔料や染料を用いることができる。顔料としては、例えば、炭酸亜鉛、酸化亜鉛、硫化亜鉛、タルク、カオリン、炭酸カルシウム、酸化チタン、シリカ、フッ化リチウム、フッ化カルシウム、硫酸バリウム、アルミナ、ジルコニア、酸化鉄系、水酸化鉄系、酸化クロム系、スピネル型焼成系、クロム酸系、クロムバーミリオン系、紺青系、アルミニウム粉末系、ブロンズ粉末系、銀粉末系、リン酸カルシウム等の無機顔料や、フタロシアニン系、アゾ系、縮合アゾ系、アゾレーキ系、アントラキノン系、ペリレン・ペリノン系、インジゴ系、チオインジゴ系、イソインドリノン系、アゾメチン系、ジオキサジン系、キナクリドン系、アニリンブラック系、トリフェニルメタン系、カーボンブラック系等の有機顔料が挙げられる。染料としては、例えば、アゾ系染料、アントラキノン、キノフタロン、スチリル、ジフェニルメタン、トリフェニルメタン、オキサジン、トリアジン、キサンタン、メタン、アゾメチン、アクリジン、ジアジンが挙げられる。着色剤は、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を適宜組み合わせて用いることができる。 Various pigments and dyes can be used as the coloring agent. Examples of pigments include zinc carbonate, zinc oxide, zinc sulfide, talc, kaolin, calcium carbonate, titanium oxide, silica, lithium fluoride, calcium fluoride, barium sulfate, alumina, zirconia, iron oxide, and iron hydroxide. , Chromium oxide type, Spinel type firing type, Chromic acid type, Chromium vermillion type, Prussian blue type, Aluminum powder type, Bronze powder type, Silver powder type, Inorganic pigment such as calcium phosphate, Phthalocyanine type, Azo type, Condensed azo type , azo lake-based, anthraquinone-based, perylene/perinone-based, indigo-based, thioindigo-based, isoindolinone-based, azomethine-based, dioxazine-based, quinacridone-based, aniline black-based, triphenylmethane-based, and carbon black-based organic pigments. be done. Examples of dyes include azo dyes, anthraquinone, quinophthalone, styryl, diphenylmethane, triphenylmethane, oxazine, triazine, xanthan, methane, azomethine, acridine, and diazine. Colorants may be used singly or in appropriate combination of two or more.
 少量の着色剤により遮光性を効率よく調節し得ることから、黒色着色剤を好ましく使用し得る。ここに開示される技術における好ましい一態様では、粘着剤層は黒色着色剤を含む。粘着剤層に含まれる黒色着色剤としては、有機または無機の着色剤(顔料、染料等)を用いることができる。黒色着色剤の具体例としては、カーボンブラック(ファーネスブラック、チャンネルブラック、アセチレンブラック、サーマルブラック、ランプブラック、松煙等)、グラファイト、酸化銅、二酸化マンガン、アニリンブラック、ペリレンブラック、チタンブラック、シアニンブラック、活性炭、フェライト(非磁性フェライト、磁性フェライト等)、マグネタイト、酸化クロム、酸化鉄、二硫化モリブデン、クロム錯体、アントラキノン系着色剤等が挙げられる。なかでもカーボンブラックが好ましい。なお、カーボンブラック粒子としては、カルボキシ基やアミノ基、スルホン酸基、ケイ素含有基(例えばアルコキシシリル基、アルキルシリル基)等の官能基を有する表面改質カーボンブラック粒子を用いることも可能である。このような表面改質カーボンブラック粒子は、自己分散型カーボンブラックとも称され、分散剤の添加が不要になったり、その添加量を低減することができる。上記カーボンブラック粒子は、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。 A black coloring agent can be preferably used because the light-shielding property can be efficiently adjusted with a small amount of the coloring agent. In a preferred aspect of the technology disclosed herein, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer contains a black colorant. As the black colorant contained in the adhesive layer, an organic or inorganic colorant (pigment, dye, etc.) can be used. Specific examples of black colorants include carbon black (furnace black, channel black, acetylene black, thermal black, lamp black, pine smoke, etc.), graphite, copper oxide, manganese dioxide, aniline black, perylene black, titanium black, and cyanine. Black, activated carbon, ferrite (non-magnetic ferrite, magnetic ferrite, etc.), magnetite, chromium oxide, iron oxide, molybdenum disulfide, chromium complexes, anthraquinone colorants, and the like. Among them, carbon black is preferred. As the carbon black particles, it is also possible to use surface-modified carbon black particles having functional groups such as carboxyl groups, amino groups, sulfonic acid groups, silicon-containing groups (e.g., alkoxysilyl groups and alkylsilyl groups). . Such surface-modified carbon black particles are also called self-dispersing carbon black, and the addition of a dispersant becomes unnecessary or the amount thereof can be reduced. The carbon black particles may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
 黒色着色剤としては、特に限定されず、粒子状の着色剤(顔料)を好ましく使用し得る。好ましい一態様において、平均粒径約10nm以上(例えば凡そ50nm以上)の黒色着色剤(例えば、カーボンブラック等の黒色顔料)を用いることができる。上記黒色着色剤の平均粒径の上限は特に限定されず、通常、凡そ500nm以下であり、好ましくは凡そ300nm以下、より好ましくは凡そ250nm以下、例えば200nm以下(例えば凡そ120nm以下)であり得る。なお、本明細書中における「平均粒径」とは、特記しない限り、レーザ散乱・回折法に基づく粒度分布測定装置に基づいて測定した粒度分布における積算値50%での粒径(50%体積平均粒子径;以下、D50と略記する場合もある。)を指す。 The black colorant is not particularly limited, and a particulate colorant (pigment) can be preferably used. In one preferred embodiment, a black colorant (eg, a black pigment such as carbon black) having an average particle size of about 10 nm or more (eg, about 50 nm or more) can be used. The upper limit of the average particle size of the black colorant is not particularly limited, and is usually about 500 nm or less, preferably about 300 nm or less, more preferably about 250 nm or less, for example 200 nm or less (for example, about 120 nm or less). In addition, unless otherwise specified, the "average particle size" in this specification means the particle size at 50% of the integrated value in the particle size distribution measured based on the particle size distribution measuring device based on the laser scattering/diffraction method (50% volume mean particle diameter; hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as D50 ).
 粘着剤層における着色剤(固形分)の使用量は特に限定されず、所望の遮光性を付与できるように適宜調整した量とすることができる。黒色着色剤の使用量は、通常、粘着剤層の総重量の0.1~30重量%程度とすることが適当であり、例えば0.1~25重量%(典型的には0.1~20重量%)とすることができる。 The amount of the coloring agent (solid content) used in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is not particularly limited, and the amount can be appropriately adjusted so as to impart the desired light-shielding properties. The amount of the black colorant used is usually about 0.1 to 30% by weight of the total weight of the adhesive layer, for example 0.1 to 25% by weight (typically 0.1 to 30% by weight). 20% by weight).
 (防錆剤)
 いくつかの態様に係る粘着剤層は防錆剤を含み得る。防錆剤としては、特に限定されず、アゾール系防錆剤、アミン化合物、亜硝酸塩類、安息香酸アンモニウム、フタル酸アンモニウム、ステアリン酸アンモニウム、パルミチン酸アンモニウム、オレイン酸アンモニウム、炭酸アンモニウム、ジシクロヘキシルアミン安息香酸塩、尿素、ウロトロピン、チオ尿素、カルバミン酸フェニル、シクロヘキシルアンモニウム-N-シクロヘキシルカルバメート(CHC)等が挙げられる。防錆剤は、1種を単独でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。
(anti-rust)
The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer according to some embodiments may contain an antirust agent. Rust inhibitors are not particularly limited, and include azole rust inhibitors, amine compounds, nitrites, ammonium benzoate, ammonium phthalate, ammonium stearate, ammonium palmitate, ammonium oleate, ammonium carbonate, and dicyclohexylamine benzoate. acid salts, urea, urotropine, thiourea, phenyl carbamate, cyclohexylammonium-N-cyclohexylcarbamate (CHC) and the like. The rust preventives can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
 防錆剤としては、アゾール系防錆剤が好ましく用いられ得る。アゾール系防錆剤としては、ヘテロ原子を2個以上含む五員環芳香族化合物であって、それらのヘテロ原子の少なくとも1個が窒素原子であるアゾール系化合物を有効成分とするものが好ましく用いられ得る。アゾール系防錆剤として使用し得る化合物の好適例として、ベンゾトリアゾール系化合物を有効成分とするベンゾトリアゾール系防錆剤が挙げられる。ベンゾトリアゾール系化合物の好適例として、1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール、5-メチルベンゾトリアゾール、4-メチルベンゾトリアゾール、カルボキシベンゾトリアゾール等が挙げられる。 As the rust inhibitor, an azole-based rust inhibitor can be preferably used. As the azole-based rust preventive agent, a five-membered ring aromatic compound containing two or more heteroatoms, in which at least one of the heteroatoms is a nitrogen atom, is preferably used as an active ingredient. can be Preferred examples of compounds that can be used as azole rust inhibitors include benzotriazole rust inhibitors containing benzotriazole compounds as active ingredients. Preferable examples of benzotriazole compounds include 1,2,3-benzotriazole, 5-methylbenzotriazole, 4-methylbenzotriazole, carboxybenzotriazole and the like.
 防錆剤の含有量は特に限定されず、例えば、ベースポリマー100重量部に対して0.01重量部以上(典型的には0.05重量部以上)とすることができる。より良好な金属腐食防止効果を得る観点から、上記含有量は、0.1重量部以上であってよく、0.3重量部以上でもよく、0.5重量部以上でもよい。一方、粘着剤の凝集力を高める観点から、防錆剤の含有量は、ベースポリマー100重量部に対して8重量部未満とすることが適当であり、5重量部以下としてもよく、2重量部以下としてもよい。 The content of the rust inhibitor is not particularly limited, and can be, for example, 0.01 parts by weight or more (typically 0.05 parts by weight or more) with respect to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. From the viewpoint of obtaining a better metal corrosion prevention effect, the content may be 0.1 parts by weight or more, 0.3 parts by weight or more, or 0.5 parts by weight or more. On the other hand, from the viewpoint of increasing the cohesive strength of the pressure-sensitive adhesive, the content of the rust inhibitor is preferably less than 8 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. It may be less than part.
 (その他の添加剤)
 粘着剤組成物には、必要に応じて、レベリング剤、架橋助剤、可塑剤、軟化剤、充填剤、帯電防止剤、老化防止剤、紫外線吸収剤、酸化防止剤、光安定剤等の粘着剤の分野において一般的な各種の添加剤が含まれていてもよい。上記各種添加剤については、従来公知のものを常法により使用することができ、特に本発明を特徴づけるものではないので、詳細な説明は省略する。
(Other additives)
The pressure-sensitive adhesive composition may optionally contain adhesive agents such as leveling agents, cross-linking aids, plasticizers, softeners, fillers, antistatic agents, anti-aging agents, ultraviolet absorbers, antioxidants, light stabilizers, and the like. Various additives common in the pharmaceutical field may be included. As for the various additives mentioned above, conventionally known ones can be used in a conventional manner, and since they do not particularly characterize the present invention, detailed description thereof will be omitted.
 ここに開示される粘着剤層(粘着剤からなる層)は、水系粘着剤組成物、溶剤型粘着剤組成物、ホットメルト型粘着剤組成物、紫外線や電子線等のような活性エネルギー線の照射により硬化する活性エネルギー線硬化型粘着剤組成物から形成された粘着剤層であり得る。水系粘着剤組成物とは、水を主成分とする溶媒(水系溶媒)中に粘着剤(粘着剤層形成成分)を含む形態の粘着剤組成物のことをいい、典型的には、水分散型粘着剤組成物(粘着剤の少なくとも一部が水に分散した形態の組成物)等と称されるものが含まれる。また、溶剤型粘着剤組成物とは、有機溶媒中に粘着剤を含む形態の粘着剤組成物のことをいう。溶剤型粘着剤組成物に含まれる有機溶媒としては、上述の溶液重合で用いられ得る有機溶媒(トルエンや酢酸エチル等)として例示した1種または2種以上を特に制限なく用いることができる。ここに開示される技術は、粘着特性等の観点から、溶剤型粘着剤組成物から形成された粘着剤層を備える態様で好ましく実施され得る。溶剤型粘着剤組成物から形成された溶剤型粘着剤層を備える態様において、ここに開示される技術による効果は好ましく実現される。 The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (layer made of pressure-sensitive adhesive) disclosed herein is a water-based pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, a solvent-based pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, a hot-melt pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, and active energy rays such as ultraviolet rays and electron beams. It may be a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer formed from an active energy ray-curable pressure-sensitive adhesive composition that is cured by irradiation. The water-based pressure-sensitive adhesive composition refers to a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition in the form of containing a pressure-sensitive adhesive (adhesive layer-forming component) in a water-based solvent (aqueous solvent), typically water-dispersed. Also included are so-called type adhesive compositions (compositions in which at least part of the adhesive is dispersed in water) and the like. Moreover, the solvent-type adhesive composition refers to an adhesive composition in the form of containing an adhesive in an organic solvent. As the organic solvent contained in the solvent-based pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, one or two or more of the organic solvents (toluene, ethyl acetate, etc.) exemplified as the organic solvent (toluene, ethyl acetate, etc.) that can be used in the above solution polymerization can be used without particular limitation. From the viewpoint of adhesive properties, the technology disclosed herein can be preferably practiced in a mode comprising a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer formed from a solvent-based pressure-sensitive adhesive composition. In an embodiment having a solvent-based pressure-sensitive adhesive layer formed from a solvent-based pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, the effects of the technique disclosed herein are preferably achieved.
 ここに開示される粘着剤層は、従来公知の方法によって形成することができる。例えば、剥離性を有する表面(剥離面)に粘着剤組成物を付与して乾燥させることにより粘着剤層を形成する方法を採用することができる。基材を有する粘着シートでは、例えば、該基材に粘着剤組成物を直接付与(典型的には塗布)して乾燥させることにより粘着剤層を形成する方法(直接法)を採用することができる。また、剥離性を有する表面(剥離面)に粘着剤組成物を付与して乾燥させることにより該表面上に粘着剤層を形成し、その粘着剤層を基材に転写する方法(転写法)を採用してもよい。上記剥離面としては、例えば、後述する剥離ライナーの表面を好ましく利用し得る。なお、ここに開示される粘着剤層は典型的には連続的に形成されるが、このような形態に限定されるものではなく、例えば点状、ストライプ状等の規則的あるいはランダムなパターンに形成された粘着剤層であってもよい。 The adhesive layer disclosed here can be formed by a conventionally known method. For example, a method of forming a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer by applying a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition to a surface having releasability (release surface) and drying can be employed. For a pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet having a substrate, for example, a method (direct method) of forming a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer by directly applying (typically applying) a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition to the substrate and drying it can be employed. can. Alternatively, a method of applying a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition to a surface having releasability (release surface) and drying to form a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on the surface and transferring the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer to a substrate (transfer method). may be adopted. As the release surface, for example, the surface of a release liner, which will be described later, can be preferably used. The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disclosed herein is typically formed continuously, but is not limited to such a form. It may be a formed pressure-sensitive adhesive layer.
 粘着剤組成物の塗布は、例えば、グラビアロールコーター、ダイコーター、バーコーター等の、従来公知のコーターを用いて行うことができる。あるいは、含浸やカーテンコート法等により粘着剤組成物を塗布してもよい。
 架橋反応の促進、製造効率向上等の観点から、粘着剤組成物の乾燥は加熱下で行うことが好ましい。乾燥温度は、例えば40~150℃程度とすることができ、60~130℃程度とすることが好ましい。粘着剤組成物を乾燥させた後、さらに、粘着剤層内における成分移行の調整、架橋反応の進行、粘着剤層内に存在し得る歪の緩和等を目的としてエージングを行ってもよい。
Application of the adhesive composition can be performed using a conventionally known coater such as a gravure roll coater, a die coater, and a bar coater. Alternatively, the adhesive composition may be applied by impregnation, curtain coating, or the like.
From the viewpoint of promoting the cross-linking reaction, improving production efficiency, etc., it is preferable to dry the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition under heating. The drying temperature can be, for example, about 40 to 150.degree. C., preferably about 60 to 130.degree. After drying the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, it may be further aged for the purpose of adjusting migration of components in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, progressing the crosslinking reaction, relaxing strain that may exist in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, and the like.
 ここに開示される粘着剤層は、単層構造であってもよく、2層以上の多層構造を有するものであってもよい。生産性等の観点から、粘着剤層は単層構造であることが好ましい。 The adhesive layer disclosed herein may have a single layer structure or a multilayer structure of two or more layers. From the viewpoint of productivity and the like, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer preferably has a single-layer structure.
 粘着剤層の厚さは特に制限されない。粘着剤層の厚さは、通常は凡そ300μm以下であり、凡そ150μm以下が適当であり、好ましくは凡そ100μm以下、より好ましくは凡そ70μm以下であり、凡そ60μm以下(例えば55μm以下)であってもよい。厚さの制限された粘着剤層は、薄厚化、軽量化の要請によく対応したものとなり得る。粘着剤層の厚さの下限は特に制限されないが、接着性、被着体追従性の観点から、例えば凡そ3μm以上であり、凡そ10μm以上が適当である。いくつかの好ましい態様において、粘着剤層の厚さは、凡そ20μm以上であり、より好ましくは凡そ30μm以上であり、凡そ40μm以上であってもよい。基材の各面に粘着剤層を有する粘着シート(基材付き両面粘着シート)において、各粘着剤層の厚さは同じであってもよく、異なっていてもよい。 The thickness of the adhesive layer is not particularly limited. The thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is usually about 300 μm or less, suitably about 150 μm or less, preferably about 100 μm or less, more preferably about 70 μm or less, and about 60 μm or less (for example, 55 μm or less). good too. A pressure-sensitive adhesive layer with a limited thickness can well meet demands for thinning and weight reduction. The lower limit of the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of adhesiveness and conformability to an adherend, it is, for example, about 3 μm or more, and about 10 μm or more is suitable. In some preferred embodiments, the thickness of the adhesive layer is approximately 20 μm or greater, more preferably approximately 30 μm or greater, and may be approximately 40 μm or greater. In a pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet having a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on each side of a substrate (double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with substrate), the thickness of each pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be the same or different.
 (ゲル分率)
 特に限定するものではないが、ここに開示される粘着剤層のゲル分率は、重量基準で、例えば20%以上とすることができ、通常は30%以上とすることが適当であり、35%よりも大きいことが好ましい。粘着剤層のゲル分率を適度な範囲で高くすることにより、被着体への追従性を向上することができる。ここに開示される技術では、上記ゲル分率は、より好ましくは45%以上、さらに好ましくは50%以上、特に好ましくは55%以上であり、60%以上であってもよい。一方、被着体への追従性の観点から、粘着剤層のゲル分率は、90%以下が適当であり、70%以下(例えば65%以下)が好ましく、60%未満であってもよい。
(Gel fraction)
Although not particularly limited, the gel fraction of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disclosed herein can be, for example, 20% or more on a weight basis, and usually 30% or more is suitable. % is preferred. By increasing the gel fraction of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer within an appropriate range, the conformability to the adherend can be improved. In the technology disclosed herein, the gel fraction is more preferably 45% or higher, still more preferably 50% or higher, particularly preferably 55% or higher, and may be 60% or higher. On the other hand, from the viewpoint of conformability to the adherend, the gel fraction of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is suitably 90% or less, preferably 70% or less (for example, 65% or less), and may be less than 60%. .
 ここで「粘着剤層のゲル分率」とは、次の方法により測定される値をいう。該ゲル分率は、粘着剤層のうち酢酸エチル不溶分の重量割合として把握され得る。
  [ゲル分率測定方法]
 約0.1gの粘着剤サンプル(重量Wg1)を平均孔径0.2μmの多孔質ポリテトラフルオロエチレン膜(重量Wg2)で巾着状に包み、口をタコ糸(重量Wg3)で縛る。上記多孔質ポリテトラフルオロエチレン(PTFE)膜としては、日東電工社から入手可能な商品名「ニトフロン(登録商標)NTF1122」(平均孔径0.2μm、気孔率75%、厚さ85μm)またはその相当品を使用する。
 この包みを酢酸エチル50mLに浸し、室温(典型的には23℃)で7日間保持して粘着剤層中のゾル成分のみを上記膜外に溶出させた後、上記包みを取り出して外表面に付着している酢酸エチルを拭き取り、該包みを130℃で2時間乾燥させ、該包みの重量(Wg4)を測定する。粘着剤層のゲル分率Fは、各値を以下の式に代入することにより求められる。後述の実施例においても同様の方法が採用される。
    ゲル分率F(%)=[(Wg4-Wg2-Wg3)/Wg1]×100
Here, the "gel fraction of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer" refers to a value measured by the following method. The gel fraction can be grasped as the weight ratio of ethyl acetate-insoluble matter in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer.
[Gel fraction measurement method]
An adhesive sample of about 0.1 g (weight Wg 1 ) is wrapped in a porous polytetrafluoroethylene membrane (weight Wg 2 ) having an average pore size of 0.2 μm, and the opening is tied with a string (weight Wg 3 ). As the porous polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) membrane, trade name "Nitoflon (registered trademark) NTF1122" available from Nitto Denko Corporation (average pore size 0.2 μm, porosity 75%, thickness 85 μm) or equivalent use the product.
This package was immersed in 50 mL of ethyl acetate and kept at room temperature (typically 23° C.) for 7 days to elute only the sol component in the adhesive layer outside the film. The adhering ethyl acetate is wiped off, the packet is dried at 130° C. for 2 hours, and the weight (Wg 4 ) of the packet is measured. The gel fraction FG of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is obtained by substituting each value into the following formula. A similar method is adopted in the examples described later.
Gel fraction F G (%)=[(Wg 4 -Wg 2 -Wg 3 )/Wg 1 ]×100
 <基材>
 ここに開示される粘着シートは基材(支持基材)を含んでもよい。ここに開示される基材の構造や材料は、特に限定されない。基材は、典型的にはフィルム状基材(「基材フィルム」ともいう。)である。基材フィルムとしては、ベースフィルムとして樹脂フィルムを含むものを好ましく用いることができる。上記ベースフィルムは、典型的には、独立して形状維持可能な(非依存性の)部材である。ここに開示される技術における基材フィルムは、このようなベースフィルムから実質的に構成されたものであり得る。あるいは、上記基材フィルムは、上記ベースフィルムの他に、補助的な層を含むものであってもよい。上記補助的な層の例としては、上記ベースフィルムの表面に設けられた着色層、反射層、下塗り層、帯電防止層等が挙げられる。
<Base material>
The adhesive sheet disclosed herein may contain a substrate (supporting substrate). The structure and material of the substrate disclosed herein are not particularly limited. The base material is typically a film-like base material (also referred to as "base film"). As the base film, a base film containing a resin film can be preferably used. The base film is typically an independently shape-maintainable (independent) member. The base film in the technique disclosed here can be substantially composed of such a base film. Alternatively, the base film may contain an auxiliary layer in addition to the base film. Examples of the auxiliary layer include a colored layer, a reflective layer, an undercoat layer, an antistatic layer, etc. provided on the surface of the base film.
 上記樹脂フィルムは、樹脂材料を主成分(例えば、当該樹脂フィルム中に50重量%を超えて含まれる成分)とするフィルムである。樹脂フィルムの例としては、ポリエチレン(PE)、ポリプロピレン(PP)、エチレン・プロピレン共重合体等のポリオレフィン系樹脂フィルム;ポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)、ポリブチレンテレフタレート(PBT)、ポリエチレンナフタレート(PEN)等のポリエステル系樹脂フィルム;ポリウレタン系樹脂フィルム;塩化ビニル系樹脂フィルム;酢酸ビニル系樹脂フィルム;ポリイミド系樹脂フィルム;ポリアミド系樹脂フィルム;フッ素樹脂フィルム;セロハン;等が挙げられる。樹脂フィルムは、天然ゴムフィルム、ブチルゴムフィルム等のゴム系フィルムであってもよい。なかでも、ハンドリング性、加工性の観点から、ポリエステルフィルムが好ましく、そのなかでもPETフィルムが特に好ましい。 The resin film is a film containing a resin material as a main component (for example, a component contained in the resin film in excess of 50% by weight). Examples of resin films include polyolefin resin films such as polyethylene (PE), polypropylene (PP), and ethylene/propylene copolymer; polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polybutylene terephthalate (PBT), polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), and the like. polyurethane resin film; vinyl chloride resin film; vinyl acetate resin film; polyimide resin film; polyamide resin film; The resin film may be a rubber-based film such as a natural rubber film or a butyl rubber film. Among them, from the viewpoint of handleability and workability, a polyester film is preferred, and a PET film is particularly preferred.
 基材フィルムは、ベースフィルム(好ましくは樹脂フィルム)の表面に配置された着色層により着色されていてもよい。このように着色層を含む構成の基材フィルムは、遮光性や意匠性を付与させ得る。ベースフィルムと着色層を含む構成の基材フィルムにおいて、上記ベースフィルムは、着色剤を含んでもよく、含まなくてもよい。上記着色層は、ベースフィルムのいずれか一方の表面に配置されてもよく、両方の表面にそれぞれ配置されてもよい。ベースフィルムの両方の表面にそれぞれ着色層を配置した構成において、それらの着色層の構成は、同一であってもよく、異なってもよい。 The base film may be colored with a colored layer arranged on the surface of the base film (preferably resin film). A base film having a structure including a colored layer in this way can impart light-shielding properties and design properties. In a base film having a structure including a base film and a colored layer, the base film may or may not contain a colorant. The colored layer may be arranged on either one surface of the base film, or may be arranged on both surfaces. In the configuration in which the colored layers are arranged on both surfaces of the base film, the configurations of the colored layers may be the same or different.
 このような着色層は、典型的には、着色剤およびバインダを含有する着色層形成用組成物を、ベースフィルムに塗布して形成することができる。着色剤としては、従来公知の顔料や染料を用いることができる。着色剤の色としては有色が好ましい。着色剤の色は、例えば、黒色、灰色、赤色、青色、黄色、緑色、黄緑色、橙色、紫色、金色、銀色、パール色等であり得る。有色系着色剤は、遮光性、意匠性を付与させ得る。着色剤は、有色系着色剤と組み合わせるかたちで無色系着色剤を含んでもよく、含まなくてもよい。ここに開示される典型的な一態様に係る基材フィルムは、無色系着色剤を実質的に含まないものであり得る。なお、本明細書において「有色」とは黒色や金属色を含む意味である。また、「無色」とは白色を含む意味である。 Such a colored layer can typically be formed by coating a base film with a colored layer-forming composition containing a coloring agent and a binder. Conventionally known pigments and dyes can be used as the colorant. As the color of the coloring agent, colored is preferred. The color of the coloring agent can be, for example, black, gray, red, blue, yellow, green, yellow-green, orange, purple, gold, silver, pearlescent, and the like. A colored coloring agent can impart light-shielding properties and design properties. The coloring agent may or may not contain a colorless coloring agent in combination with a colored coloring agent. A base film according to a typical aspect disclosed herein may be substantially free of a colorless colorant. In addition, in this specification, "colored" is a meaning including black and metallic color. In addition, the term “colorless” is meant to include white.
 バインダとしては、塗料または印刷の分野において公知の材料を特に制限なく使用することができる。例えば、ポリウレタン、フェノール樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、尿素メラミン樹脂、ポリメタクリル酸メチル等が例示される。着色層形成用組成物は、例えば、溶剤型、紫外線硬化型、熱硬化型等であり得る。着色層の形成は、従来より着色層の形成に採用されている手段を特に制限なく採用して行うことができる。例えば、グラビア印刷、フレキソ印刷、オフセット印刷等の印刷により着色層(印刷層)を形成する方法を好ましく採用し得る。 As the binder, materials known in the field of paints or printing can be used without particular limitation. Examples include polyurethane, phenol resin, epoxy resin, urea melamine resin, polymethyl methacrylate, and the like. The composition for forming a colored layer may be, for example, a solvent type, an ultraviolet curable type, a heat curable type, or the like. The formation of the colored layer can be carried out by adopting means conventionally used for forming the colored layer without particular limitation. For example, a method of forming a colored layer (printed layer) by printing such as gravure printing, flexographic printing, and offset printing can be preferably employed.
 着色層は、全体が1層からなる単層構造であってもよく、2層、3層またはそれ以上のサブ着色層を含む多層構造であってもよい。2層以上のサブ着色層を含む多層構造の着色層は、例えば、着色層形成用組成物の塗布(例えば印刷)を繰り返して行うことにより形成することができる。各サブ着色層に含まれる着色剤の色や配合量は、同一であってもよく、異なってもよい。遮光性を付与するための着色層では、ピンホールの発生を防止して遮光性を高める観点から、多層構造とすることが特に有意義である。 The colored layer may have a single layer structure consisting entirely of one layer, or may have a multilayer structure including two, three or more sub-colored layers. A colored layer having a multi-layer structure including two or more sub-colored layers can be formed, for example, by repeatedly applying (for example, printing) a composition for forming a colored layer. The colors and blending amounts of the colorants contained in each sub-colored layer may be the same or different. In the colored layer for imparting light shielding properties, it is particularly significant to have a multi-layer structure from the viewpoint of preventing pinholes and enhancing light shielding properties.
 着色層全体の厚さは、通常、1μm~10μm程度が適当であり、1μm~7μm程度が好ましく、例えば1μm~5μm程度とすることができる。二層以上のサブ着色層を含む着色層において、各サブ着色層の厚さは、通常、1μm~2μm程度が好ましい。 The thickness of the entire colored layer is usually suitably about 1 μm to 10 μm, preferably about 1 μm to 7 μm, and can be, for example, about 1 μm to 5 μm. In the colored layer including two or more sub-colored layers, the thickness of each sub-colored layer is preferably about 1 μm to 2 μm.
 基材フィルム(典型的には樹脂フィルム)は、着色剤を含有させたものであってもよい。このように着色剤を含有させた基材フィルムは、遮光性、意匠性を付与させ得る。基材フィルムに含有させる着色剤としては、従来公知の顔料や染料を用いることができる。ここに開示される技術における好ましい一態様では、基材フィルムは、黒色着色剤を含む基材フィルムであり、より具体的には、黒色着色剤が練り込まれた樹脂フィルムである。ここで黒色着色剤が練り込まれた基材フィルムとは、基材フィルムの主構成材料(基材フィルム中に最も多く含まれる材料。典型的には樹脂材料)中に、黒色着色剤が混合された基材フィルムをいう。黒色着色剤は、実質的に基材フィルム中に分散状態で含まれる。 The base film (typically a resin film) may contain a coloring agent. A base film containing a coloring agent in this way can impart light-shielding properties and design properties. Conventionally known pigments and dyes can be used as the colorant to be contained in the base film. In a preferred embodiment of the technology disclosed herein, the base film is a base film containing a black colorant, more specifically a resin film into which a black colorant is kneaded. Here, the base film in which the black colorant is kneaded means that the black colorant is mixed in the main constituent material of the base film (the material most contained in the base film, typically a resin material). It refers to a base film that has been coated. The black colorant is substantially dispersed in the base film.
 基材フィルムに含まれる黒色着色剤としては、有機または無機の着色剤(顔料、染料等)を用いることができる。黒色着色剤の具体例としては、カーボンブラック(ファーネスブラック、チャンネルブラック、アセチレンブラック、サーマルブラック、ランプブラック、松煙等)、グラファイト、酸化銅、二酸化マンガン、アニリンブラック、ペリレンブラック、チタンブラック、シアニンブラック、活性炭、フェライト(非磁性フェライト、磁性フェライト等)、マグネタイト、酸化クロム、酸化鉄、二硫化モリブデン、クロム錯体、アントラキノン系着色剤等が挙げられる。なかでもカーボンブラックが好ましい。 An organic or inorganic colorant (pigment, dye, etc.) can be used as the black colorant contained in the base film. Specific examples of black colorants include carbon black (furnace black, channel black, acetylene black, thermal black, lamp black, pine smoke, etc.), graphite, copper oxide, manganese dioxide, aniline black, perylene black, titanium black, and cyanine. Black, activated carbon, ferrite (non-magnetic ferrite, magnetic ferrite, etc.), magnetite, chromium oxide, iron oxide, molybdenum disulfide, chromium complexes, anthraquinone colorants, and the like. Among them, carbon black is preferred.
 黒色着色剤としては、特に限定されず、粒子状の着色剤(顔料)を好ましく使用し得る。好ましい一態様において、平均粒径約10nm以上(例えば凡そ50nm以上)の黒色着色剤(例えば、カーボンブラック等の黒色顔料)を用いることができる。上記黒色着色剤の平均粒径の上限は特に限定されず、通常、凡そ500nm以下であり、好ましくは凡そ300nm以下、より好ましくは凡そ250nm以下、例えば200nm以下(例えば凡そ120nm以下)であり得る。 The black colorant is not particularly limited, and a particulate colorant (pigment) can be preferably used. In one preferred embodiment, a black colorant (eg, a black pigment such as carbon black) having an average particle size of about 10 nm or more (eg, about 50 nm or more) can be used. The upper limit of the average particle size of the black colorant is not particularly limited, and is usually about 500 nm or less, preferably about 300 nm or less, more preferably about 250 nm or less, for example 200 nm or less (for example, about 120 nm or less).
 基材フィルムにおける着色剤の使用量は特に限定されず、所望の遮光性を付与できるように適宜調整した量とすることができる。黒色着色剤の使用量は、通常、基材フィルムの総重量の0.1~30重量%程度とすることが適当であり、例えば0.1~25重量%(典型的には0.1~20重量%)とすることができる。 The amount of the coloring agent used in the base film is not particularly limited, and the amount can be appropriately adjusted so as to impart the desired light-shielding properties. The amount of the black colorant used is usually about 0.1 to 30% by weight of the total weight of the base film, for example 0.1 to 25% by weight (typically 0.1 to 30% by weight). 20% by weight).
 ここに開示される基材フィルムは、黒色着色剤以外の着色剤(顔料や染料)を含んでもよい。そのような非黒色着色剤として、例えば白色着色剤が挙げられる。白色着色剤としては、例えば、酸化チタン(ルチル型二酸化チタン、アナターゼ型二酸化チタン等の二酸化チタン)、酸化亜鉛、酸化アルミニウム、酸化ケイ素、酸化ジルコニウム、酸化マグネシウム、酸化カルシウム、酸化スズ、酸化バリウム、酸化セシウム、酸化イットリウム、炭酸マグネシウム、炭酸カルシウム(軽質炭酸カルシウム、重質炭酸カルシウム等)、炭酸バリウム、炭酸亜鉛、水酸化アルミニウム、水酸化カルシウム、水酸化マグネシウム、水酸化亜鉛、珪酸アルミニウム、珪酸マグネシウム、珪酸カルシウム、硫酸バリウム、硫酸カルシウム、ステアリン酸バリウム、亜鉛華、硫化亜鉛、タルク、シリカ、アルミナ、クレー、カオリン、燐酸チタン、マイカ、石膏、ホワイトカーボン、珪藻土、ベントナイト、リトポン、ゼオライト、セリサイト、加水ハロイサイト等の無機系白色着色剤や、アクリル系樹脂粒子、ポリスチレン系樹脂粒子、ポリウレタン系樹脂粒子、アミド系樹脂粒子、ポリカーボネート系樹脂粒子、シリコーン系樹脂粒子、尿素-ホルマリン系樹脂粒子、メラミン系樹脂粒子等の有機系白色着色剤等が挙げられる。 The base film disclosed herein may contain coloring agents (pigments and dyes) other than black coloring agents. Such non-black colorants include, for example, white colorants. White colorants include, for example, titanium oxide (titanium dioxide such as rutile-type titanium dioxide and anatase-type titanium dioxide), zinc oxide, aluminum oxide, silicon oxide, zirconium oxide, magnesium oxide, calcium oxide, tin oxide, barium oxide, Cesium oxide, yttrium oxide, magnesium carbonate, calcium carbonate (light calcium carbonate, heavy calcium carbonate, etc.), barium carbonate, zinc carbonate, aluminum hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, magnesium hydroxide, zinc hydroxide, aluminum silicate, magnesium silicate , calcium silicate, barium sulfate, calcium sulfate, barium stearate, zinc oxide, zinc sulfide, talc, silica, alumina, clay, kaolin, titanium phosphate, mica, gypsum, white carbon, diatomaceous earth, bentonite, lithopone, zeolite, sericite , Inorganic white colorants such as hydrated halloysite, acrylic resin particles, polystyrene resin particles, polyurethane resin particles, amide resin particles, polycarbonate resin particles, silicone resin particles, urea-formalin resin particles, melamine and organic white colorants such as organic resin particles.
 基材フィルムにおける非黒色着色剤の使用量は特に限定されず、所望の遮光性を付与できるように適宜調整した量とすることができる。非黒色着色剤の使用量は、通常、樹脂フィルムの重量の0.1~30重量%程度とすることが適当であり、例えば0.1~25重量%(典型的には0.1~20重量%)とすることができる。 The amount of the non-black colorant used in the base film is not particularly limited, and the amount can be appropriately adjusted so as to impart the desired light-shielding properties. The amount of the non-black colorant used is usually about 0.1 to 30% by weight of the resin film, for example 0.1 to 25% by weight (typically 0.1 to 20% by weight). % by weight).
 上記基材フィルムには、必要に応じて、充填剤(無機充填剤、有機充填剤等)、分散剤(界面活性剤等)、老化防止剤、酸化防止剤、紫外線吸収剤、帯電防止剤、滑剤、可塑剤等の各種添加剤が配合されていてもよい。各種添加剤の配合割合は、通常は30重量%未満(例えば20重量%未満、典型的には10重量%未満)程度である。 If necessary, the base film may contain fillers (inorganic fillers, organic fillers, etc.), dispersants (surfactants, etc.), anti-aging agents, antioxidants, ultraviolet absorbers, antistatic agents, Various additives such as lubricants and plasticizers may be added. The blending ratio of various additives is usually about less than 30% by weight (for example, less than 20% by weight, typically less than 10% by weight).
 上記基材フィルムは、単層構造であってもよく、2層、3層またはそれ以上の多層構造を有するものであってもよい。形状安定性の観点から、基材フィルムは単層構造であることが好ましい。多層構造の場合、少なくとも一つの層(好ましくは全ての層)は上記樹脂(例えばポリエステル系樹脂)の連続構造を有する層であることが好ましい。基材フィルム(典型的には樹脂フィルム)の製造方法は、従来公知の方法を適宜採用すればよく、特に限定されない。例えば、押出成形、インフレーション成形、Tダイキャスト成形、カレンダーロール成形等の従来公知の一般的なフィルム成形方法を適宜採用することができる。 The base film may have a single-layer structure, or may have a multi-layer structure of two layers, three layers or more. From the viewpoint of shape stability, the substrate film preferably has a single-layer structure. In the case of a multilayer structure, at least one layer (preferably all layers) is preferably a layer having a continuous structure of the resin (for example, polyester resin). The method for producing the substrate film (typically the resin film) is not particularly limited, and any conventionally known method may be appropriately adopted. For example, conventionally known general film forming methods such as extrusion molding, inflation molding, T-die casting, and calender roll molding can be employed as appropriate.
 ここに開示される基材の厚さは、特に限定されない。基材の厚さは、通常は3μm以上であり、好ましくは5μm以上(例えば10μm以上)である。いくつかの態様において、基材の厚さは20μm以上であってもよく、30μm以上でもよく、40μm以上でもよく、100μm以上でもよく、200μm以上でもよい。基材の厚さは、通常500μm以下であり、軽量化の観点から好ましくは400μm以下であり、より好ましくは300μm以下である。いくつかの態様において、基材の厚さは250μm以下であってもよく、200μm以下でもよく、150μm以下でもよく、100μm以下でもよく、50μm以下でもよい。なお、基材がベースフィルムと着色層とを含んで構成される場合、上記基材の厚さはベースフィルムと着色層の合計厚さであり得る。 The thickness of the base material disclosed here is not particularly limited. The thickness of the substrate is usually 3 μm or more, preferably 5 μm or more (for example, 10 μm or more). In some embodiments, the thickness of the substrate may be 20 μm or greater, 30 μm or greater, 40 μm or greater, 100 μm or greater, 200 μm or greater. The thickness of the substrate is usually 500 μm or less, preferably 400 μm or less, more preferably 300 μm or less from the viewpoint of weight reduction. In some aspects, the thickness of the substrate may be 250 μm or less, 200 μm or less, 150 μm or less, 100 μm or less, or 50 μm or less. When the substrate includes a base film and a colored layer, the thickness of the substrate may be the total thickness of the base film and the colored layer.
 基材フィルムの表面には、コロナ放電処理、プラズマ処理、紫外線照射処理、酸処理、アルカリ処理、下塗り剤の塗布等の、従来公知の表面処理が施されていてもよい。このような表面処理は、基材フィルムと粘着剤層との密着性、言い換えると粘着剤層の基材フィルムへの投錨性を向上させるための処理であり得る。ここに開示される技術が、基材付き片面粘着シートの形態で実施される場合、基材フィルムの背面に、必要に応じて剥離処理が施されていてもよい。剥離処理は、例えば、一般的なシリコーン系、長鎖アルキル系、フッ素系等の剥離処理剤を、典型的には0.01μm~1μm(例えば0.01μm~0.1μm)程度の薄膜状に付与する処理であり得る。かかる剥離処理を施すことにより、粘着シートをロール状に巻回した巻回体の巻き戻しを容易にする等の効果が得られる。 The surface of the base film may be subjected to conventionally known surface treatments such as corona discharge treatment, plasma treatment, ultraviolet irradiation treatment, acid treatment, alkali treatment, application of a primer, and the like. Such a surface treatment can be a treatment for improving the adhesion between the base film and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, in other words, the anchoring property of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer to the base film. When the technology disclosed herein is implemented in the form of a substrate-attached single-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet, the back surface of the substrate film may be subjected to release treatment as necessary. For the release treatment, for example, a general silicone-based, long-chain alkyl-based, fluorine-based, etc. release agent is typically applied to a thin film of about 0.01 μm to 1 μm (eg, 0.01 μm to 0.1 μm). It can be a treatment to give. By performing such a peeling treatment, it is possible to obtain effects such as facilitating the unwinding of the adhesive sheet wound into a roll.
 <剥離ライナー>
 ここに開示される技術において、粘着剤層の形成、粘着シートの作製、積層体の作製、使用前の積層体の保存、流通、形状加工等の際に、剥離ライナーを用いることができる。剥離ライナーとしては、特に限定されず、例えば、樹脂フィルムや紙等のライナー基材の表面に剥離処理層を有する剥離ライナーや、フッ素系ポリマー(ポリテトラフルオロエチレン等)やポリオレフィン系樹脂(PE、PP等)の低接着性材料からなる剥離ライナー等を用いることができる。上記剥離処理層は、例えば、シリコーン系、長鎖アルキル系、フッ素系、硫化モリブデン等の剥離処理剤により上記ライナー基材を表面処理して形成されたものであり得る。
<Release liner>
In the technology disclosed herein, a release liner can be used in the formation of the adhesive layer, the production of the adhesive sheet, the production of the laminate, the storage of the laminate before use, distribution, shape processing, and the like. The release liner is not particularly limited. For example, a release liner having a release treatment layer on the surface of a liner substrate such as a resin film or paper, a fluoropolymer (such as polytetrafluoroethylene), or a polyolefin resin (PE, A release liner or the like made of a low-adhesive material such as PP can be used. The release treatment layer may be formed by surface-treating the liner base material with a release treatment agent such as a silicone-based, long-chain alkyl-based, fluorine-based, or molybdenum sulfide release agent.
 <積層体の特性>
 ここに開示される積層体は、後述の実施例に記載の方法で測定される段差防水試験において合格レベルの段差追従性を有することが好ましい。上記特性を満足する積層体は、複雑な形状に隙間なく追従した状態を維持しやすい。
<Laminate characteristics>
The laminate disclosed herein preferably has step followability at a pass level in a step waterproof test measured by the method described in Examples below. A laminate that satisfies the above characteristics tends to maintain a state in which it follows a complicated shape without gaps.
 ここに開示される積層体は、後述の実施例に記載の方法で測定される歪み変形性試験において合格レベルの耐歪み性を有する(すなわち、歪みを生じさせない)ことが好ましい。上記特性を満足する積層体は、実質的に積層体の厚さ方向(Z軸方向)に付与される荷重に対して優れた耐変形性を有し、被着体に歪みが生じるのを抑制しやすい。 The laminate disclosed herein preferably has an acceptable level of strain resistance (that is, does not cause strain) in a strain deformation test measured by the method described in Examples below. A laminate that satisfies the above characteristics has excellent deformation resistance against a load applied substantially in the thickness direction (Z-axis direction) of the laminate, and suppresses the occurrence of distortion in the adherend. It's easy to do.
 ここに開示される積層体(剥離ライナーを含まない。)の総厚さTtotalは特に限定されない。積層体の総厚さTtotalは、例えば1000μm以下とすることができ、薄膜化の観点からは、積層体の総厚さTtotalは500μm以下(例えば400μm以下)が好ましく、より好ましくは350μm以下であり、さらに好ましくは300μm以下である。ここに開示される技術によると、たとえ積層体の総厚さTtotalが十分に小さくても、良好な耐歪み性を示す傾向にある。積層体の総厚さTtotalの下限は特に限定されないが、通常は20μm以上が適当であり、好ましくは30μm以上、より好ましくは40μm以上、さらに好ましくは50μm以上であり、60μm以上であってもよく、70μm以上でもよく、80μm以上でもよい。 The total thickness T total of the laminate (not including the release liner) disclosed herein is not particularly limited. The total thickness T total of the laminate can be, for example, 1000 μm or less, and from the viewpoint of thinning, the total thickness T total of the laminate is preferably 500 μm or less (eg, 400 μm or less), more preferably 350 μm or less. and more preferably 300 μm or less. According to the technology disclosed herein, even if the total thickness T total of the laminate is sufficiently small, it tends to exhibit good strain resistance. The lower limit of the total thickness T total of the laminate is not particularly limited, but is usually 20 μm or more, preferably 30 μm or more, more preferably 40 μm or more, still more preferably 50 μm or more, and even 60 μm or more. Well, it may be 70 μm or more, or it may be 80 μm or more.
 積層体の光透過率Ctotalは特に限定されない。ここに開示される技術において、意匠性を付与したり、積層体の遮光性を向上させる観点から、積層体の光透過率Ctotalは20%以下であることが好ましく、より好ましくは10%以下、さらに好ましくは5%以下、特に好ましくは1.5%以下である。上記光透過率Ctotalの下限は特に制限されず、実質的に0%、すなわち検出限界以下であってもよく、1%以上でもよく、5%以上でもよく、15%以上でもよい。 The light transmittance C total of the laminate is not particularly limited. In the technology disclosed herein, the light transmittance C total of the laminate is preferably 20% or less, more preferably 10% or less, from the viewpoint of imparting design properties and improving the light-shielding property of the laminate. , more preferably 5% or less, particularly preferably 1.5% or less. The lower limit of the light transmittance C total is not particularly limited, and may be substantially 0%, that is, the detection limit or less, 1% or more, 5% or more, or 15% or more.
 ここに開示される技術において、積層体の光透過率Ctotalは下記の方法で測定することができる。後述の実施例においても下記の方法で測定される。 In the technique disclosed here, the light transmittance C total of the laminate can be measured by the following method. Also in the examples described later, it is measured by the following method.
 [光透過率Ctotal
 積層体の光透過率Ctotal[%]は、剥離ライナーから剥がした積層体の厚さ方向の光透過率(波長550nmの光透過率)であり、JIS K 7136:2000に準拠して、市販の透過率計を使用して測定される。透過率計としては、日立製作所製の分光光度計(装置名「U4150型分光光度計」)またはその相当品が用いられる。
[Light transmittance C total ]
The light transmittance C total [%] of the laminate is the light transmittance in the thickness direction of the laminate peeled off from the release liner (light transmittance at a wavelength of 550 nm). is measured using a transmissometer. As the transmittance meter, a spectrophotometer manufactured by Hitachi (apparatus name “U4150 type spectrophotometer”) or an equivalent thereof is used.
 <用途>
 ここに開示される積層体は、複雑な形状への追従性と耐歪み性に優れる。このような特徴を活かして、上記積層体は、耐変形性および耐歪み性が要求される各種用途に利用され得る。例えば、折り曲げ形状を有する部材を有する各種携帯電子機器の部材固定用途に好適である。また、携帯電子機器は、外部から衝撃や荷重が付加されることがあるため、ここに開示される粘着シートを用いて、被着体の歪みの発生を抑制する利点は大きい。上記携帯電子機器の非限定的な例には、携帯電話、スマートフォン、タブレット型パソコン、ノート型パソコン、各種ウェアラブル機器(例えば、腕時計のように手首に装着するリストウェア型、クリップやストラップ等で体の一部に装着するモジュラー型、メガネ型(単眼型や両眼型。ヘッドマウント型も含む。)を包含するアイウェア型、シャツや靴下、帽子等に例えばアクセサリの形態で取り付ける衣服型、イヤホンのように耳に取り付けるイヤウェア型等)、デジタルカメラ、デジタルビデオカメラ、音響機器(携帯音楽プレーヤー、ICレコーダー等)、計算機(電卓等)、携帯ゲーム機器、電子辞書、電子手帳、電子書籍、車載用情報機器、携帯ラジオ、携帯テレビ、携帯プリンター、携帯スキャナ、携帯モデム等が含まれる。なお、この明細書において「携帯」とは、単に携帯することが可能であるだけでは充分ではなく、個人(標準的な成人)が相対的に容易に持ち運び可能なレベルの携帯性を有することを意味するものとする。
<Application>
The laminate disclosed herein has excellent conformability to complicated shapes and resistance to distortion. Taking advantage of such characteristics, the laminate can be used in various applications requiring deformation resistance and strain resistance. For example, it is suitable for fixing members of various portable electronic devices having members having a bent shape. In addition, since portable electronic devices may be subjected to external impacts and loads, the use of the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet disclosed herein is highly advantageous in suppressing the occurrence of distortion of adherends. Non-limiting examples of the above portable electronic devices include mobile phones, smartphones, tablet computers, notebook computers, various wearable devices (for example, wrist wear type worn on the wrist like a wristwatch, Eyewear type including glasses type (monocular type and binocular type, including head-mounted type), clothes type attached to shirts, socks, hats, etc. in the form of accessories, earphones ear-wear type, etc.), digital cameras, digital video cameras, audio equipment (portable music players, IC recorders, etc.), calculators (calculators, etc.), portable game devices, electronic dictionaries, electronic notebooks, electronic books, vehicle-mounted information equipment, portable radios, portable televisions, portable printers, portable scanners, portable modems, etc. In this specification, the term “portable” means not only being able to be simply carried, but also having a level of portability that allows an individual (a typical adult) to carry it relatively easily. shall mean.
 また、ここに開示される粘着シートは、携帯電子機器において、該携帯電子機器を構成する3次元形状(典型的には、曲面形状)を有するカバーガラス等の部材を固定する用途に好ましく用いられる。また、段差を有する被着体表面の固定にも好適である。ここに開示される粘着シートは、被着体への追従性に優れるので、上記3次元形状や段差を有する複雑な形状に対しても、よく追従して密着することができる。そのような3次元形状や段差を有する被着体表面に対して隙間なく密着して良好な固定機能を発揮しつつ、例えば防水性が要求される製品(例えば携帯電子機器等の電子機器)に対して優れた防水性を付与し得る。 In addition, the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet disclosed herein is preferably used for fixing a member such as a cover glass having a three-dimensional shape (typically a curved surface shape) constituting the portable electronic device. . It is also suitable for fixing the surface of an adherend having steps. Since the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet disclosed herein is excellent in followability to an adherend, it can adhere well to the above three-dimensional shape and complicated shape having steps. While exhibiting a good fixing function by closely adhering to the surface of the adherend having such a three-dimensional shape and steps, for example, it is suitable for products that require waterproofness (for example, electronic devices such as portable electronic devices). It can provide excellent waterproofness.
 また、ここに開示される積層体は、携帯電子機器において、該携帯電子機器を構成するフレキシブルプリント配線板等の部材を固定する用途に好ましく用いられる。ここに開示される積層体は、複雑な形状への追従性に優れるので、上記フレキシブルプリント配線板等の折り曲げられた形状を有する被着体に対しても、信頼性良く接着することができる。また、フレキシブルプリント配線板等に固定される電子部品等に歪みが生じるのを抑制することができる。 In addition, the laminate disclosed herein is preferably used in mobile electronic devices for fixing members such as flexible printed wiring boards constituting the mobile electronic devices. Since the laminate disclosed herein has excellent conformability to a complicated shape, it can be reliably adhered to an adherend having a bent shape such as the flexible printed wiring board. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of distortion in the electronic components fixed to the flexible printed wiring board or the like.
 ここに開示される積層体は、種々の外形に加工された接合材の形態で、上述したような携帯電子機器を構成する部材の固定に利用され得る。なかでも有機EL表示装置や液晶表示装置を備える電子機器(典型的には携帯電子機器)に好ましく使用され得る。例えば、タッチパネル式ディスプレイ等の表示部を有する電子機器(典型的には、スマートフォン等の携帯電子機器)であって、大画面の表示部を有する機器の部材固定に、ここに開示される粘着シートは好ましく用いられる。ここに開示される積層体は、カバー部材等の部材や、有機ELユニットを固定するものであってもよい。ここに開示される積層体は、上記のような表示装置の構成要素として好ましく用いられる。 The laminate disclosed here can be used in the form of bonding materials processed into various external shapes to fix members constituting the portable electronic device as described above. Among others, it can be preferably used for electronic equipment (typically portable electronic equipment) equipped with an organic EL display device or a liquid crystal display device. For example, an electronic device having a display part such as a touch panel display (typically a mobile electronic device such as a smartphone), and the adhesive sheet disclosed herein is used for fixing members of the device having a large-screen display part. is preferably used. The laminate disclosed herein may be used to fix a member such as a cover member or an organic EL unit. The laminate disclosed herein is preferably used as a component of the display device as described above.
 この明細書により開示される事項には以下のものが含まれる。
 〔1〕 芯体と、
 該芯体の一方の表面に配置された、粘着剤層を含む第1の粘着シートと、
 該芯体の他方の表面に配置された、粘着剤層を含む第2の粘着シートと、を備える積層体であって、
 上記芯体のヤング率E[MPa]と厚さT[μm]の積(E×T)は500000以上であり、
 上記第1の粘着シートおよび上記第2の粘着シートの一方または両方の厚さTは、10μmより大きく、かつ、25℃における貯蔵弾性率G′(25℃)が0.20MPa未満である、積層体。
 〔2〕 上記第1の粘着シートおよび上記第2の粘着シートの一方または両方は、
 85℃における貯蔵弾性率G′(85℃)は0.05MPa未満である、上記〔1〕に記載の積層体。
 〔3〕 上記第1の粘着シートおよび上記第2の粘着シートの一方または両方は、
 120℃における貯蔵弾性率G′(120℃)は0.03MPa未満である、上記〔1〕または〔2〕に記載の積層体。
 〔4〕 上記第1の粘着シートおよび上記第2の粘着シートの一方または両方に含まれる粘着剤層は、ベースポリマーとしてアクリル系ポリマーを含むアクリル系粘着剤層である、上記〔1〕~〔3〕のいずれかに記載の粘着シート。
 〔5〕 上記芯体の厚さTは、20μm以上270μm以下である、上記〔1〕~〔4〕のいずれかに記載の積層体。
 〔6〕 上記芯体のヤング率Eは、3000MPa以上である、上記〔1〕~〔5〕のいずれかに記載の積層体。
 〔7〕 光透過率Ctotalが10%以下である、上記〔1〕~〔6〕のいずれかに記載の積層体。
 〔8〕 上記積層体の総厚さTtotalは50μm以上400μm以下である、上記〔1〕~〔7〕のいずれかに記載の積層体。
 〔9〕 携帯電子機器において部材の固定に用いられる、上記〔1〕~〔8〕のいずれかに記載の積層体。
Matters disclosed by this specification include the following.
[1] a core body;
a first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet containing a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disposed on one surface of the core;
and a second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet containing a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disposed on the other surface of the core, wherein
The product (E A ×T A ) of Young's modulus E A [MPa] and thickness T A [μm] of the core is 500000 or more,
The thickness T B of one or both of the first adhesive sheet and the second adhesive sheet is greater than 10 μm, and the storage elastic modulus G′ at 25° C. (25° C.) is less than 0.20 MPa. laminate.
[2] one or both of the first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet,
The laminate according to [1] above, which has a storage modulus G' (85°C) at 85°C of less than 0.05 MPa.
[3] one or both of the first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet,
The laminate according to [1] or [2] above, which has a storage modulus G' (120°C) at 120°C of less than 0.03 MPa.
[4] The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer contained in one or both of the first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive layer containing an acrylic polymer as a base polymer, the above [1] to [ 3] The pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet according to any one of the above items.
[5] The laminate according to any one of [1] to [4] above, wherein the core has a thickness T A of 20 μm or more and 270 μm or less.
[6] The laminate according to any one of [1] to [5] above, wherein the Young's modulus E A of the core is 3000 MPa or more.
[7] The laminate according to any one of [1] to [6] above, which has a light transmittance C total of 10% or less.
[8] The laminate according to any one of [1] to [7], wherein the laminate has a total thickness T total of 50 μm or more and 400 μm or less.
[9] The laminate according to any one of [1] to [8] above, which is used for fixing a member in a portable electronic device.
 以下、本発明に関するいくつかの実施例を説明するが、本発明をかかる実施例に示すものに限定することを意図したものではない。なお、以下の説明において「部」および「%」は、特に断りがない限り重量基準である。 Several examples of the present invention will be described below, but the present invention is not intended to be limited to those shown in the examples. In the following description, "parts" and "%" are by weight unless otherwise specified.
 (粘着剤組成物Eの調製)
 攪拌機、温度計、窒素ガス導入管、還流冷却器および滴下ロートを備えた反応容器に、モノマー成分としてのBA95部およびAA5部と、重合溶媒としての酢酸エチル233部とを仕込み、窒素ガスを導入しながら2時間撹拌した。このようにして重合系内の酸素を除去した後、重合開始剤として0.2部の2,2’-アゾビスイソブチロニトリル(AIBN)を加え、60℃で8時間溶液重合してアクリル系ポリマーEの溶液を得た。このアクリル系ポリマーEのMwは約60×10であった。
(Preparation of adhesive composition E)
95 parts of BA and 5 parts of AA as monomer components and 233 parts of ethyl acetate as a polymerization solvent were charged into a reaction vessel equipped with a stirrer, thermometer, nitrogen gas inlet tube, reflux condenser and dropping funnel, and nitrogen gas was introduced. The mixture was stirred for 2 hours while stirring. After removing oxygen in the polymerization system in this way, 0.2 parts of 2,2′-azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN) is added as a polymerization initiator, and the solution is polymerized at 60° C. for 8 hours to obtain acrylic resin. A solution of system polymer E was obtained. Mw of this acrylic polymer E was about 60×10 4 .
 上記アクリル系ポリマー溶液に、該溶液に含まれるアクリル系ポリマーE100部に対して、粘着付与樹脂としてテルペンフェノール樹脂B20部と、架橋剤としてイソシアネート系架橋剤3部およびエポキシ系架橋剤0.01部とを加え、攪拌混合して粘着剤組成物Eを調製した。テルペンフェノール樹脂B(粘着付与樹脂B)としては、商品名「YSポリスターT-115」(ヤスハラケミカル社製、軟化点約115℃、水酸基価30~60mgKOH/g)を用いた。 In the above acrylic polymer solution, 20 parts of terpene phenol resin B as a tackifying resin, 3 parts of an isocyanate cross-linking agent and 0.01 part of an epoxy cross-linking agent are added to 100 parts of the acrylic polymer E contained in the solution. was added and mixed with stirring to prepare a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition E. As terpene phenol resin B (tackifier resin B), trade name "YS Polystar T-115" (manufactured by Yasuhara Chemical Co., Ltd., softening point of about 115°C, hydroxyl value of 30 to 60 mgKOH/g) was used.
 (粘着剤組成物Eblackの調製)
 攪拌機、温度計、窒素ガス導入管、還流冷却器および滴下ロートを備えた反応容器に、モノマー成分としてのBA95部およびAA5部と、重合溶媒としての酢酸エチル233部とを仕込み、窒素ガスを導入しながら2時間撹拌した。このようにして重合系内の酸素を除去した後、重合開始剤として0.2部の2,2’-アゾビスイソブチロニトリル(AIBN)を加え、60℃で8時間溶液重合してアクリル系ポリマーEの溶液を得た。このアクリル系ポリマーEのMwは約60×10であった。
(Preparation of adhesive composition E black )
95 parts of BA and 5 parts of AA as monomer components and 233 parts of ethyl acetate as a polymerization solvent were charged into a reaction vessel equipped with a stirrer, thermometer, nitrogen gas inlet tube, reflux condenser and dropping funnel, and nitrogen gas was introduced. The mixture was stirred for 2 hours while stirring. After removing oxygen in the polymerization system in this way, 0.2 parts of 2,2′-azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN) is added as a polymerization initiator, and the solution is polymerized at 60° C. for 8 hours to obtain acrylic resin. A solution of system polymer E was obtained. Mw of this acrylic polymer E was about 60×10 4 .
 上記アクリル系ポリマー溶液に、該溶液に含まれるアクリル系ポリマーE100部に対して、粘着付与樹脂としてテルペンフェノール樹脂B20部と、架橋剤としてイソシアネート系架橋剤3部およびエポキシ系架橋剤0.01部とを加え、さらに着色剤(黒色着色剤)としてカーボンブラック粒子の分散液(トーヨーカラー社製、商品名「マルチラックA903」)を、カーボンブラック粒子の含有量が、アクリル系ポリマーE100部に対して2部となるように添加し、攪拌混合して粘着剤組成物Eblackを調製した。テルペンフェノール樹脂B(粘着付与樹脂B)としては、商品名「YSポリスターT-115」(ヤスハラケミカル社製、軟化点約115℃、水酸基価30~60mgKOH/g)を用いた。 In the above acrylic polymer solution, 20 parts of terpene phenol resin B as a tackifying resin, 3 parts of an isocyanate cross-linking agent and 0.01 part of an epoxy cross-linking agent are added to 100 parts of the acrylic polymer E contained in the solution. In addition, a dispersion of carbon black particles (manufactured by Toyocolor Co., Ltd., trade name "Multilac A903") is added as a coloring agent (black coloring agent), and the content of carbon black particles is set to 100 parts of acrylic polymer E was added so as to be 2 parts, and mixed with stirring to prepare a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition E black . As terpene phenol resin B (tackifier resin B), trade name "YS Polystar T-115" (manufactured by Yasuhara Chemical Co., Ltd., softening point of about 115°C, hydroxyl value of 30 to 60 mgKOH/g) was used.
 (粘着剤組成物Fの調製)
 攪拌機、温度計、窒素ガス導入管、還流冷却器および滴下ロートを備えた反応容器に、モノマー成分としてのBA70部、2EHA30部およびAA3部と、重合溶媒としての酢酸エチル233部とを仕込み、窒素ガスを導入しながら2時間撹拌した。このようにして重合系内の酸素を除去した後、重合開始剤として0.08部の2,2’-アゾビスイソブチロニトリル(AIBN)を加え、60℃で8時間溶液重合してアクリル系ポリマーFの溶液を得た。このアクリル系ポリマーFのMwは約40×10であった。
(Preparation of adhesive composition F)
A reaction vessel equipped with a stirrer, a thermometer, a nitrogen gas inlet tube, a reflux condenser and a dropping funnel was charged with 70 parts of BA, 30 parts of 2EHA and 3 parts of AA as monomer components, and 233 parts of ethyl acetate as a polymerization solvent. Stirred for 2 hours while introducing gas. After removing oxygen in the polymerization system in this way, 0.08 part of 2,2′-azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN) is added as a polymerization initiator, and the solution is polymerized at 60° C. for 8 hours to obtain acrylic resin. A solution of system polymer F was obtained. Mw of this acrylic polymer F was about 40×10 4 .
 上記アクリル系ポリマー溶液に、該溶液に含まれるアクリル系ポリマーF100部に対して、架橋剤としてイソシアネート系架橋剤2部およびエポキシ系架橋剤0.01部とを加え、攪拌混合して粘着剤組成物Fを調製した。 To the above acrylic polymer solution, 2 parts of an isocyanate cross-linking agent and 0.01 part of an epoxy cross-linking agent are added as cross-linking agents to 100 parts of the acrylic polymer F contained in the solution, and mixed with stirring to form a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition. Item F was prepared.
 (粘着剤組成物Gの調製)
 攪拌機、温度計、窒素ガス導入管、還流冷却器および滴下ロートを備えた反応容器に、モノマー成分としての2EHA100部およびAA2部と、重合溶媒としての酢酸エチル233部とを仕込み、窒素ガスを導入しながら2時間撹拌した。このようにして重合系内の酸素を除去した後、重合開始剤として0.02部の過酸化ベンゾイル(日本油脂社製、商品名「ナイパーBW」)を加え、60℃で8時間溶液重合してアクリル系ポリマーGの溶液を得た。このアクリル系ポリマーGのMwは約40×10であった。
(Preparation of adhesive composition G)
A reaction vessel equipped with a stirrer, a thermometer, a nitrogen gas inlet tube, a reflux condenser and a dropping funnel was charged with 100 parts of 2EHA and 2 parts of AA as monomer components, and 233 parts of ethyl acetate as a polymerization solvent, and nitrogen gas was introduced. The mixture was stirred for 2 hours while stirring. After removing oxygen from the polymerization system in this way, 0.02 part of benzoyl peroxide (manufactured by NOF Corporation, trade name "Nyper BW") was added as a polymerization initiator, and solution polymerization was carried out at 60°C for 8 hours. to obtain a solution of acrylic polymer G. Mw of this acrylic polymer G was about 40×10 4 .
 上記アクリル系ポリマー溶液に、該溶液に含まれるアクリル系ポリマーG100部に対して、架橋剤としてイソシアネート系架橋剤2部およびエポキシ系架橋剤0.01部とを加え、攪拌混合して粘着剤組成物Gを調製した。 To the above acrylic polymer solution, 2 parts of an isocyanate cross-linking agent and 0.01 part of an epoxy cross-linking agent are added as cross-linking agents to 100 parts of the acrylic polymer G contained in the solution, and mixed with stirring to form a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition. Item G was prepared.
 (粘着剤組成物Hの調製)
 攪拌機、温度計、窒素ガス導入管、還流冷却器および滴下ロートを備えた反応容器に、モノマー成分としての2EHA95部およびAA5部と、重合溶媒としての酢酸エチル233部とを仕込み、窒素ガスを導入しながら2時間撹拌した。このようにして重合系内の酸素を除去した後、重合開始剤として0.03部の過酸化ベンゾイル(日本油脂社製、商品名「ナイパーBW」)を加え、60℃で8時間溶液重合してアクリル系ポリマーHの溶液を得た。このアクリル系ポリマーHのMwは約120×10であった。
(Preparation of adhesive composition H)
A reaction vessel equipped with a stirrer, a thermometer, a nitrogen gas inlet tube, a reflux condenser and a dropping funnel was charged with 95 parts of 2EHA and 5 parts of AA as monomer components and 233 parts of ethyl acetate as a polymerization solvent, and nitrogen gas was introduced. The mixture was stirred for 2 hours while stirring. After removing oxygen from the polymerization system in this way, 0.03 parts of benzoyl peroxide (manufactured by NOF Corporation, trade name "NIPER BW") was added as a polymerization initiator, and solution polymerization was carried out at 60°C for 8 hours. to obtain a solution of acrylic polymer H. Mw of this acrylic polymer H was about 120×10 4 .
 上記アクリル系ポリマー溶液に、該溶液に含まれるアクリル系ポリマーH100部に対して、架橋剤としてイソシアネート系架橋剤3部およびエポキシ系架橋剤0.03部とを加え、攪拌混合して粘着剤組成物Hを調製した。 To the above acrylic polymer solution, 3 parts of an isocyanate cross-linking agent and 0.03 parts of an epoxy cross-linking agent are added as cross-linking agents to 100 parts of the acrylic polymer H contained in the solution, and mixed with stirring to form an adhesive composition. Item H was prepared.
 (粘着剤組成物Aの調製)
 攪拌機、温度計、窒素ガス導入管、還流冷却器および滴下ロートを備えた反応容器に、モノマー成分としてのn-ブチルアクリレート(BA)95部およびアクリル酸(AA)5部と、重合溶媒としての酢酸エチル233部とを仕込み、窒素ガスを導入しながら2時間撹拌した。このようにして重合系内の酸素を除去した後、重合開始剤として0.2部の2,2’-アゾビスイソブチロニトリル(AIBN)を加え、60℃で8時間溶液重合してアクリル系ポリマーAの溶液を得た。このアクリル系ポリマーAのMwは約60×10であった。
(Preparation of adhesive composition A)
A reaction vessel equipped with a stirrer, a thermometer, a nitrogen gas inlet tube, a reflux condenser and a dropping funnel was charged with 95 parts of n-butyl acrylate (BA) and 5 parts of acrylic acid (AA) as monomer components, and 233 parts of ethyl acetate were charged, and the mixture was stirred for 2 hours while nitrogen gas was introduced. After removing oxygen in the polymerization system in this way, 0.2 parts of 2,2′-azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN) is added as a polymerization initiator, and the solution is polymerized at 60° C. for 8 hours to obtain acrylic resin. A solution of system polymer A was obtained. Mw of this acrylic polymer A was about 60×10 4 .
 上記アクリル系ポリマー溶液に、該溶液に含まれるアクリル系ポリマーA100部に対して、粘着付与樹脂Aとしてテルペンフェノール樹脂A30部と、架橋剤としてイソシアネート系架橋剤2部およびエポキシ系架橋剤0.01部とを加え、攪拌混合して粘着剤組成物Aを調製した。テルペンフェノール樹脂A(粘着付与樹脂A)としては、商品名「YSポリスターS-145」(ヤスハラケミカル社製、軟化点約145℃、水酸基価70~110mgKOH/g)を用いた。イソシアネート系架橋剤としては、商品名「コロネートL」(東ソー社製、トリメチロールプロパン/トリレンジイソシアネート3量体付加物の75%酢酸エチル溶液)を用いた。エポキシ系架橋剤としては、商品名「TETRAD-C」(三菱瓦斯化学社製、1,3-ビス(N,N-ジグリシジルアミノメチル)シクロへキサン)を用いた。イソシアネート系架橋剤およびエポキシ系架橋剤については、以下の他の粘着剤組成物を作製する際にも上記と同じものを用いた。 In the above acrylic polymer solution, 30 parts of terpene phenol resin A as tackifier resin A, 2 parts of isocyanate cross-linking agent and 0.01 of epoxy cross-linking agent are added to 100 parts of acrylic polymer A contained in the solution. and mixed with stirring to prepare a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition A. As the terpene phenol resin A (tackifier resin A), the trade name "YS Polystar S-145" (manufactured by Yasuhara Chemical Co., Ltd., softening point of about 145° C., hydroxyl value of 70 to 110 mgKOH/g) was used. As the isocyanate-based cross-linking agent, trade name "Coronate L" (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, 75% ethyl acetate solution of trimethylolpropane/tolylene diisocyanate trimer adduct) was used. As the epoxy-based cross-linking agent, trade name "TETRAD-C" (manufactured by Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Co., Ltd., 1,3-bis(N,N-diglycidylaminomethyl)cyclohexane) was used. The isocyanate-based cross-linking agent and the epoxy-based cross-linking agent were the same as those described above when preparing other pressure-sensitive adhesive compositions below.
 粘着剤組成物E,Eblack,F,G,HおよびAの組成やベースポリマーの重量平均分子量に関する概要を表1に示す。 Table 1 summarizes the composition of the adhesive compositions E, E black , F, G, H and A and the weight average molecular weight of the base polymer.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000001
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000001
 <例1>
 (粘着シートの作製)
 厚さ38μmのポリエステル製剥離ライナー(商品名「ダイアホイルMRF」、三菱ポリエステル社製)の剥離面に粘着剤組成物Eを塗布し、100℃で2分間乾燥させて、厚さ15μmの粘着剤層を形成した。このようにして、片面が上記ポリエステル製剥離ライナーで保護された厚さ15μmの基材レス両面粘着シートを得た。上記基材レス両面粘着シートを2枚用意し、本例の第1の粘着シートと第2の粘着シートとした。
<Example 1>
(Preparation of adhesive sheet)
Adhesive composition E was applied to the release surface of a 38 μm thick polyester release liner (trade name “Diafoil MRF”, manufactured by Mitsubishi Polyester Co., Ltd.) and dried at 100° C. for 2 minutes to form a 15 μm thick adhesive. formed a layer. Thus, a substrate-less double-sided PSA sheet having a thickness of 15 μm, one side of which was protected by the polyester release liner, was obtained. Two sheets of the substrate-less double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet were prepared and used as the first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet of this example.
 (積層体の作製)
 第1の粘着シートの粘着面を芯体としての厚さ20μmのステンレス鋼シート(SUS 304BA)の一方の面に貼り付けた。また、第2の粘着シートの粘着面を上記ステンレス鋼シート(SUS 304BA)の他方の面に貼り付けた。このようにして、芯体の両面に第1および第2の粘着シートがそれぞれ配置され、かつ2枚の剥離ライナーで第1の粘着シートの粘着面と第2の粘着シートの粘着面が保護された積層体を作製し、これを本例の積層体とした。
(Preparation of laminate)
The adhesive surface of the first adhesive sheet was attached to one surface of a stainless steel sheet (SUS 304BA) having a thickness of 20 μm as a core. Also, the adhesive surface of the second adhesive sheet was attached to the other surface of the stainless steel sheet (SUS 304BA). In this manner, the first and second adhesive sheets are arranged on both sides of the core, and the two release liners protect the adhesive surface of the first adhesive sheet and the adhesive surface of the second adhesive sheet. A laminated body was produced, and this was used as the laminated body of this example.
 <例2~4>
 第1の粘着シート(粘着剤層)の厚さ、第2の粘着シート(粘着剤層)および/または芯体の厚さを表1のようにしたことの他は、例1と同様にして、本例の積層体を得た。
<Examples 2 to 4>
In the same manner as in Example 1, except that the thickness of the first adhesive sheet (adhesive layer), the thickness of the second adhesive sheet (adhesive layer) and/or the core body are as shown in Table 1. , to obtain the laminate of this example.
 <例5>
 厚さ38μmのポリエステル製剥離ライナー(商品名「ダイアホイルMRF」、三菱ポリエステル社製)を2枚用意した。各剥離ライナーの剥離面に粘着剤組成物Eを塗布し、100℃で2分間乾燥させて、厚さ10μmの粘着剤層を形成した。支持基材として、厚さ5μmの透明なPETフィルム(商品名「ルミラー」、東レ社製)と該PETフィルムの片面に設けられた黒色印刷層とからなる合計厚さ約10μmの多層構造の支持基材を用意した。上記黒色印刷層は、黒色着色剤を含むインク組成物を用い、グラビア印刷法を利用して印刷を行うことにより形成した。上記支持基材の第一面および第二面に各剥離ライナー上に形成された粘着剤層を貼り合わせることにより、黒色印刷PETフィルムの第一面および第二面に粘着剤層を有する、厚さ30μmの基材付き両面粘着シートを作製した。上記基材付き両面粘着シートを2枚用意し、本例の第1の粘着シートと第2の粘着シートとした。本例の第1および第2の粘着シートを用いたことの他は、例1と同様の方法を用いて、本例の積層体を作製した。
<Example 5>
Two sheets of a 38 μm thick polyester release liner (trade name “Diafoil MRF”, manufactured by Mitsubishi Polyester Co., Ltd.) were prepared. The adhesive composition E was applied to the release surface of each release liner and dried at 100° C. for 2 minutes to form an adhesive layer having a thickness of 10 μm. As a supporting substrate, a multi-layer structure support with a total thickness of about 10 μm consisting of a 5 μm thick transparent PET film (trade name “Lumirror”, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.) and a black printed layer provided on one side of the PET film. A substrate was prepared. The black printed layer was formed by printing using an ink composition containing a black colorant and using a gravure printing method. By laminating the adhesive layer formed on each release liner to the first surface and the second surface of the supporting substrate, a thick film having an adhesive layer on the first surface and the second surface of the black printed PET film is obtained. A double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate having a thickness of 30 μm was produced. Two sheets of the double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with the base material were prepared and used as the first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet of this example. A laminate of this example was produced using the same method as in Example 1, except that the first and second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets of this example were used.
 <例6>
 各剥離ライナー上に形成する粘着剤層の厚さを45μmとし、さらに支持基材として、黒色顔料を練りこんだ厚さ50μmのPETフィルム(商品名「ルミラー」、東レ社製)を使用したこと以外は例5と同様にして、厚さ140μmの基材付き両面粘着シートを作製し、本例の第1および第2の粘着シートとした。本例の第1および第2の粘着シートを用いたことの他は、例1と同様の方法を用いて、本例の積層体を作製した。
<Example 6>
The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer formed on each release liner has a thickness of 45 μm, and a 50 μm-thick PET film (trade name “Lumirror”, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.) kneaded with a black pigment is used as a support base material. A 140 μm-thick double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate was produced in the same manner as in Example 5 except that the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets were the first and second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets of this example. A laminate of this example was produced using the same method as in Example 1, except that the first and second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets of this example were used.
 <例7>
 粘着剤層の厚さを20μmとしたこと以外は例1と同様の方法を用いて、厚さ20μmの基材レス両面粘着シートを作製し、本例の第1の粘着シートとした。
<Example 7>
A substrate-less double-sided PSA sheet with a thickness of 20 μm was produced using the same method as in Example 1, except that the thickness of the PSA layer was 20 μm, and used as the first PSA sheet of this example.
 各剥離ライナー上に形成する粘着剤層の厚さを50μmとし、さらに支持基材として、厚さ160μmの透明なPETフィルム(商品名「ルミラー」、東レ社製)を使用したこと以外は例5と同様にして、厚さ260μmの基材付き両面粘着シートを作製し、本例の第2の粘着シートとした。 Example 5 except that the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer formed on each release liner had a thickness of 50 μm, and a transparent PET film having a thickness of 160 μm (trade name “Lumirror”, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.) was used as the supporting substrate. A double-faced PSA sheet with a substrate having a thickness of 260 μm was prepared in the same manner as in , and used as the second PSA sheet of this example.
 本例の第1および第2の粘着シートを用いたことの他は、例1と同様の方法を用いて、本例の積層体を作製した。 A laminate of this example was produced using the same method as in Example 1, except that the first and second adhesive sheets of this example were used.
 <例8>
 粘着剤層の厚さを20μmとしたこと以外は例1の第1および第2の粘着シートと同様の方法を用いて、厚さ20μmの基材レス両面粘着シートを作製し、本例の第1の粘着シートとした。
<Example 8>
A substrate-less double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a thickness of 20 μm was prepared using the same method as the first and second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets of Example 1, except that the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer was 20 μm. 1 adhesive sheet.
 各剥離ライナー上に形成する粘着剤層の厚さを12.5μmとし、さらに支持基材として、厚さ235μmの透明なPETフィルム(商品名「ルミラー」、東レ社製)を使用したこと以外は例5と同様にして例5と同様にして、厚さ260μmの基材付き両面粘着シートを作製し、例8の第2の粘着シートとした。 Except that the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer formed on each release liner was 12.5 μm, and a transparent PET film (trade name “Lumirror”, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.) with a thickness of 235 μm was used as the supporting substrate. In the same manner as in Example 5, a double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate having a thickness of 260 μm was produced as the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet of Example 8.
 本例の第1および第2の粘着シートを用いたことの他は、例1と同様の方法を用いて、本例の積層体を作製した。 A laminate of this example was produced using the same method as in Example 1, except that the first and second adhesive sheets of this example were used.
 <例9>
 芯体として厚さ20μmのアルミニウムシート(商品名「A1N30H-O」、竹内金属箔粉社製)を用いたことの他は、例1と同様の方法を用いて、本例の積層体を作製した。
<Example 9>
A laminate of this example was produced in the same manner as in Example 1, except that an aluminum sheet with a thickness of 20 μm (trade name “A1N30H-O”, manufactured by Takeuchi Metal Foil & Powder Co., Ltd.) was used as the core. bottom.
 <例10>
 芯体として厚さ20μmの銅シート(商品名「C1020R-H」、竹内金属箔粉社製)を用いたことの他は、例1と同様の方法を用いて、本例の積層体を作製した。
<Example 10>
A laminate of this example was produced in the same manner as in Example 1, except that a 20 μm thick copper sheet (trade name “C1020R-H”, manufactured by Takeuchi Metal Foil & Powder Co., Ltd.) was used as the core. bottom.
 <例11>
 芯体として厚さ125μmの透明なPETフィルム(商品名「ルミラー」、東レ社製)を用いたことの他は、例1と同様の方法を用いて、本例の積層体を作製した。
<Example 11>
A laminate of this example was produced in the same manner as in Example 1, except that a 125 μm thick transparent PET film (trade name “Lumirror”, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.) was used as the core.
 <例12>
 粘着剤組成物Eの代わりに粘着剤組成物Eblackを用いたことの他は、例1と同様の方法を用いて、厚さ15μmの基材レス両面粘着シートを作製し、本例の第1および第2の粘着シートとした。本例の第1および第2の粘着シートを用いたことの他は、例11と同様の方法を用いて、本例の積層体を作製した。
<Example 12>
A substrate-less double-sided PSA sheet with a thickness of 15 μm was produced in the same manner as in Example 1, except that PSA composition E black was used instead of PSA composition E. 1 and 2 pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets. A laminate of this example was produced using the same method as in Example 11, except that the first and second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets of this example were used.
 <例13>
 粘着剤組成物Eの代わりに粘着剤組成物Fを用いたことの他は、例2と同様の方法を用いて、厚さ30μmの基材レス両面粘着シートを作製し、本例の第1および第2の粘着シートとした。本例の第1および第2の粘着シートを用いたことの他は、例1と同様の方法を用いて、本例の積層体を作製した。
<Example 13>
A 30 μm-thick substrate-less double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet was produced in the same manner as in Example 2, except that the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition F was used instead of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition E. and a second adhesive sheet. A laminate of this example was produced using the same method as in Example 1, except that the first and second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets of this example were used.
 <例14>
 粘着剤組成物Eの代わりに粘着剤組成物Gを用いたことの他は、例2と同様の方法を用いて、厚さ30μmの基材レス両面粘着シートを作製し、本例の第1および第2の粘着シートとした。本例の第1および第2の粘着シートを用いたことの他は、例1と同様の方法を用いて、本例の積層体を作製した。
<Example 14>
A 30 μm-thick substrate-less double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet was produced in the same manner as in Example 2, except that the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition G was used instead of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition E. and a second adhesive sheet. A laminate of this example was produced using the same method as in Example 1, except that the first and second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets of this example were used.
 <例15>
 粘着剤組成物Eの代わりに粘着剤組成物Hを用いたことの他は、例2と同様の方法を用いて、厚さ30μmの基材レス両面粘着シートを作製し、本例の第1および第2の粘着シートとした。本例の第1および第2の粘着シートを用いたことの他は、例1と同様の方法を用いて、本例の積層体を作製した。
<Example 15>
A 30 μm-thick substrate-less double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet was produced in the same manner as in Example 2, except that the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition H was used instead of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition E. and a second adhesive sheet. A laminate of this example was produced using the same method as in Example 1, except that the first and second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets of this example were used.
 <例16>
 粘着剤層の厚さを10μmにしたことの他は、例1と同様の方法を用いて、厚さ10μmの基材レス両面粘着シートを作製し、本例の第1および第2の粘着シートとした。本例の第1および第2の粘着シートを用いたことの他は、例1と同様の方法を用いて、本例の積層体を作製した。
<Example 16>
A 10 μm-thick substrate-less double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet was produced in the same manner as in Example 1, except that the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer was 10 μm. and A laminate of this example was produced using the same method as in Example 1, except that the first and second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets of this example were used.
 <例17>
 芯体として厚さ100μmの透明なPETフィルム(商品名「ルミラー」、東レ社製)を用いたことの他は、例1と同様の方法を用いて、本例の積層体を作製した。
<Example 17>
A laminate of this example was produced in the same manner as in Example 1, except that a 100 μm thick transparent PET film (trade name “Lumirror”, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.) was used as the core.
 <例18>
 粘着剤組成物Eの代わりに粘着剤組成物Aを用いたことと、粘着剤層の厚さを35μmにしたことの他は、例1と同様の方法を用いて、厚さ35μmの基材レス両面粘着シートを作製し、本例の第1の粘着シートとした。また、粘着剤組成物Aの代わりに粘着剤組成物Fを用いたことと、粘着剤層の厚さを25μmにしたことの他は、例1と同様の方法を用いて、厚さ25μmの基材レス両面粘着シートを作製し、本例の第2の粘着シートとした。
本例の第1および第2の粘着シートを用いたことと、芯体として厚さ40μmのステンレス鋼シート(SUS 304BA)を用いたことの他は、例1と同様の方法を用いて、本例の積層体を作製した。
<Example 18>
A substrate with a thickness of 35 μm was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the adhesive composition A was used instead of the adhesive composition E and the thickness of the adhesive layer was 35 μm. A less double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet was prepared and used as the first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet of this example. In addition, the same method as in Example 1 was used except that the adhesive composition F was used instead of the adhesive composition A and the thickness of the adhesive layer was 25 μm. A substrate-less double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet was produced and used as the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet of this example.
Using the same method as in Example 1, except that the first and second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets of this example were used and a stainless steel sheet (SUS 304BA) having a thickness of 40 μm was used as the core body, this Example laminates were produced.
 表2および表3に各例の積層体の概要;各例の粘着シートの光透過率C;積層体の光透過率Ctotal;芯体のヤング率E[MPa]、厚さT[μ]mおよびE×T;積層体の総厚さTtotal;を記載する。 Tables 2 and 3 show the outline of the laminate of each example; light transmittance CB of the adhesive sheet of each example; light transmittance C total of the laminate; Young's modulus EA [MPa] of the core, thickness TA [μ]m and E A ×T A ; the total thickness T total of the laminate are described.
 <評価方法>
 [段差防水試験]
 剥離ライナーで両粘着面が保護された各例に係る積層体を、24.5mm×24.5mmの正方形状の外縁を有し、幅2mmの窓枠状(額縁状)にカットして、窓枠状積層体を得た。この窓枠状積層体の第2の粘着シート側の剥離ライナーを剥がし、露出した粘着面を、50mm×50mmの正方形で、厚さ2mmのアクリル板に貼り付けて、窓枠状積層体付きアクリル板を作製した。窓枠状積層体付きアクリル板から第1の粘着シート側の剥離ライナーを剥がした。
 上記アクリル板よりも大きいサイズを有するポリカーボネート板を用意し、このポリカーボネート板の表面に、段差テープ(幅5mm、高さ20μm)を貼り付けた。この段差テープは、ポリカーボネート板の表面に凸(段差)を設ける目的で用いられるものである。ここでは、段差テープとして、PET基材の片面に粘着剤層を有する粘着シートを使用した。そして、このポリカーボネート板上に上記で作製した窓枠状積層体付きアクリル板を、該積層体の第1の粘着シート側がポリカーボネート側を向くような姿勢で、窓枠状積層体の平行する二辺の中央部が段差テープを横切るように(窓枠状積層体の上記平行する二辺が段差テープと交差(直交)するように)配置し、0.2MPa、1分間の条件で圧着した。このようにして評価用サンプルを得た。得られた評価用サンプルは、窓枠状積層体が被着体(アクリル板、ポリカーボネート板および段差テープ)に密着している場合、その内側は外部から密閉された空間となる。
 段差防水性の評価は、評価用サンプルを、オートクレーブ内にて水中に沈め、上記オートクレーブ内にて、25℃、0.5MPaの加圧を30分間実施し、評価用サンプル内部(窓枠状積層体内側)への浸水の有無を目視で観察することにより行った。評価用サンプル内部への浸水の有無を、段差追従性として評価した。評価用サンプル内部への浸水が観察された場合は「P:不良」、観察されなかった場合は「G:良好」と判定した。評価結果を表2および表3の段差追従性の項目に示した。
 なお、上記段差防水試験は、評価用サンプルを標準状態(23℃、50%RH)で30分間エージングしてから行った。
<Evaluation method>
[Step waterproof test]
The laminate according to each example in which both adhesive surfaces are protected with a release liner is cut into a window frame shape (picture frame shape) having a square outer edge of 24.5 mm × 24.5 mm and a width of 2 mm. A frame-shaped laminate was obtained. The release liner on the side of the second adhesive sheet of this window-frame laminate is peeled off, and the exposed adhesive surface is attached to an acrylic plate having a square size of 50 mm × 50 mm and a thickness of 2 mm. A plate was made. The release liner on the side of the first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet was peeled off from the window-frame laminate-attached acrylic plate.
A polycarbonate plate having a size larger than that of the acrylic plate was prepared, and a level difference tape (width 5 mm, height 20 μm) was attached to the surface of this polycarbonate plate. This level difference tape is used for the purpose of providing projections (level differences) on the surface of the polycarbonate plate. Here, an adhesive sheet having an adhesive layer on one side of a PET substrate was used as the stepped tape. Then, on this polycarbonate plate, the acrylic plate with the window-frame-shaped laminate prepared above was placed on two parallel sides of the window-frame-shaped laminate in such a position that the first adhesive sheet side of the laminate faces the polycarbonate side. The central portion of the window frame-like laminate crosses the stepped tape (so that the two parallel sides of the window frame laminate intersect (perpendicularly) with the stepped tape), and crimped under the conditions of 0.2 MPa and 1 minute. A sample for evaluation was thus obtained. In the obtained evaluation sample, when the window-frame-shaped laminate is adhered to the adherend (acrylic plate, polycarbonate plate, and stepped tape), the inside becomes a space sealed from the outside.
Evaluation of step waterproofing is carried out by immersing the evaluation sample in water in the autoclave, pressurizing at 25 ° C. and 0.5 MPa for 30 minutes in the autoclave, and the inside of the evaluation sample (window frame-like laminate The presence or absence of water intrusion into the inside of the body) was visually observed. The presence or absence of water infiltration into the evaluation sample was evaluated as step followability. When water infiltration into the evaluation sample was observed, it was judged as "P: Poor", and when it was not observed, it was judged as "G: Good". The evaluation results are shown in Tables 2 and 3 in the step followability item.
The step waterproof test was performed after aging the evaluation sample for 30 minutes under standard conditions (23° C., 50% RH).
 [耐歪み性試験]
 図4Aに示すように、縦50mm、横50mm、厚さ125μmのPETフィルム80と、幅2mm、長さ50mm、高さ8mmの段差テープ82を用意し、段差テープ82をPETフィルム80の表面の中央部に、段差テープ82の長さ方向とPETフィルム80の一辺の方向とを一致させるようにして貼りつけた。段差テープ82は、PETフィルム80の表面に凸(段差)を設ける目的で用いられるものである。ここでは、段差テープ82として、PET基材の片面に粘着剤層を有する粘着シートを使用した。次いで、剥離ライナーで両粘着面が保護された各例に係る積層体を縦10mm、横10mmのサイズにカットし、積層体から2枚の剥離ライナーを剥がして露出した各粘着面にそれぞれ厚さ5μmのPETフィルムを貼り付けて裏打ちし、積層体試料片84とした。また、縦50mm、横50mm、厚さ3mmの市販のシリコンゴムシート86を用意した。積層体試料片84をシリコンゴムシート86の上面の中央部に、積層体試料片84の一辺の方向とシリコンゴムシート86の一辺の方向とを一致させるようにして配置した。
[Distortion resistance test]
As shown in FIG. 4A, a PET film 80 having a length of 50 mm, a width of 50 mm, and a thickness of 125 μm and a stepped tape 82 having a width of 2 mm, a length of 50 mm, and a height of 8 mm are prepared. The stepped tape 82 was attached to the central portion so that the length direction of the PET film 80 was aligned with the direction of one side of the PET film 80 . The stepped tape 82 is used for the purpose of forming projections (steps) on the surface of the PET film 80 . Here, as the level difference tape 82, an adhesive sheet having an adhesive layer on one side of a PET base material was used. Next, the laminate according to each example in which both adhesive surfaces were protected with a release liner was cut into a size of 10 mm in length and 10 mm in width, and two release liners were peeled off from the laminate, and each adhesive surface was exposed to a thickness. A 5 μm PET film was adhered and backed to obtain a laminate sample piece 84 . A commercially available silicone rubber sheet 86 having a length of 50 mm, a width of 50 mm and a thickness of 3 mm was prepared. A laminate sample piece 84 was placed in the center of the upper surface of a silicon rubber sheet 86 so that the direction of one side of the laminate sample piece 84 and the direction of one side of the silicon rubber sheet 86 were aligned.
 PETフィルム80を、段差テープ82を下側にする姿勢で、シリコンゴムシート86の上方に配置した。このとき、PETフィルム80は上方からみてシリコンゴムシート86と重なる位置に配置した。次いで、図4Bに示すように、25℃、50%RHの環境下で、PETフィルム80の上方からシリコンゴムシート86側に向けて40Nの荷重を10秒間付与した。その後、図4Cに示すように、PETフィルム80を上方に引き上げ、さらに積層体試料片84を取り除いたシリコンゴムシート86を、25℃、50%RHの環境下で24時間放置し、放置後のシリコンゴムシート86の歪み高さを表面形状測定装置(型番「Wyko NT9100」、Veeco社製)を用いて測定し、該歪み高さを積層体の耐歪み性として評価した。ここで、図4Dに示すように、上記24時間放置後のシリコンゴムシート86について、荷重が付与されなかった部分のシリコンゴムシート86の高さaから、荷重が付与された部分の高さbを減じた値(a―b)を歪み高さcとした。歪み高さcが3μm以下である場合を「G:良好」、歪み高さcが3μmより大きい場合を「P:不良」と判定した。評価結果を表2および表3の耐歪み性の項目に示した。 The PET film 80 was placed above the silicon rubber sheet 86 with the stepped tape 82 facing downward. At this time, the PET film 80 was arranged at a position overlapping the silicon rubber sheet 86 when viewed from above. Then, as shown in FIG. 4B, a load of 40 N was applied from above the PET film 80 toward the silicon rubber sheet 86 for 10 seconds under an environment of 25° C. and 50% RH. After that, as shown in FIG. 4C, the PET film 80 was pulled upward, and the silicon rubber sheet 86 from which the laminate sample piece 84 was removed was left for 24 hours in an environment of 25° C. and 50% RH. The strain height of the silicon rubber sheet 86 was measured using a surface shape measuring device (model number "Wyko NT9100", manufactured by Veeco), and the strain height was evaluated as the strain resistance of the laminate. Here, as shown in FIG. 4D, for the silicon rubber sheet 86 after being left for 24 hours, the height b of the portion to which the load was applied from the height a of the portion to which no load was applied to the silicon rubber sheet 86 The value (ab) obtained by subtracting is taken as the strain height c. When the strain height c was 3 μm or less, it was determined as “G: Good”, and when the strain height c was greater than 3 μm, it was determined as “P: Poor”. The evaluation results are shown in Tables 2 and 3 in the item of strain resistance.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000003
 表2および表3に示す結果から明らかなように、芯体のヤング率E[MPa]と厚さT[μm]の積(E×T)が500000以上である例1~16および18の積層体は、(E×T)が400000である例17の積層体と比較して、顕著に優れた耐歪み性を示した。また、第1および第2の粘着シートの厚さTがいずれも10μmより大きい例1~例15,17および18の積層体は、第1および第2の粘着シートの厚さTがいずれも10μmである例16の積層体と比較して、顕著に優れた段差追従性を示した。さらに、第1および第2の粘着シートの25℃における貯蔵弾性率G′(25℃)が0.20MPa未満である例1~17の積層体は、第1および第2の粘着シートの貯蔵弾性率G′(25℃)が0.260MPaである例18の積層体と比較して、優れた段差追従性を示した。 As is clear from the results shown in Tables 2 and 3, Examples 1 to 16 in which the product (E A ×T A ) of the Young's modulus E A [MPa] and the thickness T A [μm] of the core is 500000 or more. and 18 showed significantly better strain resistance compared to the laminate of Example 17, where (E A ×T A ) is 400,000. In addition, the laminates of Examples 1 to 15, 17 and 18, in which the thickness T B of the first and second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets are all larger than 10 μm, have the thickness T B of the first and second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets Compared to the laminate of Example 16, which has a thickness of 10 μm, it exhibited remarkably excellent step followability. Furthermore, the laminates of Examples 1 to 17, in which the storage elastic modulus G' (25°C) at 25°C of the first and second adhesive sheets is less than 0.20 MPa, are the storage elastic moduli of the first and second adhesive sheets. Compared to the laminate of Example 18, which had a modulus G' (25°C) of 0.260 MPa, it showed excellent step followability.
 以上、本発明の具体例を詳細に説明したが、これらは例示にすぎず、請求の範囲を限定するものではない。請求の範囲に記載の技術には、以上に例示した具体例を様々に変形、変更したものが含まれる。 Specific examples of the present invention have been described in detail above, but these are merely examples and do not limit the scope of the claims. The technology described in the claims includes various modifications and changes of the specific examples illustrated above.
1  積層体
11 第1の粘着シート
12 第2の粘着シート
15 芯体
21 剥離ライナー
25,35 基材
32,34,36,38 粘着剤層
50 PC板
60 PETフィルム
70 積層体試料片
80 PETフィルム
82 段差テープ
84 積層体試料片
86 シリコンゴムシート
1 laminate 11 first adhesive sheet 12 second adhesive sheet 15 core 21 release liners 25, 35 substrates 32, 34, 36, 38 adhesive layer 50 PC board 60 PET film 70 laminate sample piece 80 PET film 82 step tape 84 laminate sample piece 86 silicon rubber sheet

Claims (8)

  1.  芯体と、
     該芯体の一方の表面に配置された、粘着剤層を含む第1の粘着シートと、
     該芯体の他方の表面に配置された、粘着剤層を含む第2の粘着シートと、を備える積層体であって、
     前記芯体のヤング率E[MPa]と厚さT[μm]の積(E×T)は500000以上であり、
     前記第1の粘着シートおよび前記第2の粘着シートの一方または両方は、厚さTが10μmより大きく、かつ、25℃における貯蔵弾性率G′(25℃)が0.20MPa未満である、積層体。
    a core body;
    a first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet containing a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disposed on one surface of the core;
    and a second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet containing a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disposed on the other surface of the core, wherein
    The product (E A ×T A ) of Young's modulus E A [MPa] and thickness T A [μm] of the core is 500000 or more,
    One or both of the first pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and the second pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet have a thickness TB greater than 10 μm and a storage elastic modulus G′ at 25° C. (25° C.) of less than 0.20 MPa. laminate.
  2.  前記第1の粘着シートおよび前記第2の粘着シートの一方または両方は、
     85℃における貯蔵弾性率G′(85℃)が0.05MPa未満である、請求項1に記載の積層体。
    one or both of the first adhesive sheet and the second adhesive sheet,
    2. Laminate according to claim 1, wherein the storage modulus G' at 85[deg.]C (85[deg.]C) is less than 0.05 MPa.
  3.  前記第1の粘着シートおよび前記第2の粘着シートの一方または両方は、
     120℃における貯蔵弾性率G′(120℃)が0.03MPa未満である、請求項1または2に記載の積層体。
    one or both of the first adhesive sheet and the second adhesive sheet,
    3. The laminate according to claim 1, wherein the storage modulus G' at 120[deg.] C. (120[deg.] C.) is less than 0.03 MPa.
  4.  前記芯体の厚さTは、10μm以上300μm以下である、請求項1から3のいずれか一項に記載の積層体。 The laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the core has a thickness TA of 10 µm or more and 300 µm or less.
  5.  前記芯体のヤング率Eは、3000MPa以上である、請求項1から4のいずれか一項に記載の積層体。 The laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the core has a Young's modulus EA of 3000 MPa or more.
  6.  光透過率Ctotalが10%以下である、請求項1から5のいずれか一項に記載の積層体。 The laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the light transmittance C total is 10% or less.
  7.  前記積層体の総厚さTtotalは50μm以上400μm以下である、請求項1から6のいずれか一項に記載の積層体。 The laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the laminate has a total thickness T total of 50 µm or more and 400 µm or less.
  8.  携帯電子機器において部材の固定に用いられる、請求項1から7のいずれか一項に記載の積層体。 The laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 7, which is used for fixing members in portable electronic devices.
PCT/JP2022/031804 2021-08-27 2022-08-24 Laminate WO2023027092A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR1020247009966A KR20240055780A (en) 2021-08-27 2022-08-24 laminate
CN202280056859.7A CN117836386A (en) 2021-08-27 2022-08-24 Laminate body

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2021-139359 2021-08-27
JP2021139359A JP2023032966A (en) 2021-08-27 2021-08-27 laminate

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023027092A1 true WO2023027092A1 (en) 2023-03-02

Family

ID=85322791

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2022/031804 WO2023027092A1 (en) 2021-08-27 2022-08-24 Laminate

Country Status (4)

Country Link
JP (1) JP2023032966A (en)
KR (1) KR20240055780A (en)
CN (1) CN117836386A (en)
WO (1) WO2023027092A1 (en)

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2012062342A (en) * 2010-09-14 2012-03-29 Nitto Denko Corp Double-sided adhesive sheet
JP2018028051A (en) * 2016-08-10 2018-02-22 日東電工株式会社 Pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet
JP2018145340A (en) * 2017-03-08 2018-09-20 リンテック株式会社 Adhesive film
WO2019087277A1 (en) * 2017-10-31 2019-05-09 株式会社寺岡製作所 Adhesive tape
JP2021134226A (en) * 2020-02-21 2021-09-13 株式会社巴川製紙所 Double-sided adhesive sheet
JP2022133053A (en) * 2021-03-01 2022-09-13 Mccアドバンスドモールディングス株式会社 Anti-corrosion laminate film and anti-corrosion tape

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP7175622B2 (en) 2017-10-06 2022-11-21 日東電工株式会社 Acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition and pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2012062342A (en) * 2010-09-14 2012-03-29 Nitto Denko Corp Double-sided adhesive sheet
JP2018028051A (en) * 2016-08-10 2018-02-22 日東電工株式会社 Pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet
JP2018145340A (en) * 2017-03-08 2018-09-20 リンテック株式会社 Adhesive film
WO2019087277A1 (en) * 2017-10-31 2019-05-09 株式会社寺岡製作所 Adhesive tape
JP2021134226A (en) * 2020-02-21 2021-09-13 株式会社巴川製紙所 Double-sided adhesive sheet
JP2022133053A (en) * 2021-03-01 2022-09-13 Mccアドバンスドモールディングス株式会社 Anti-corrosion laminate film and anti-corrosion tape

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN117836386A (en) 2024-04-05
JP2023032966A (en) 2023-03-09
KR20240055780A (en) 2024-04-29

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6945090B1 (en) Adhesive sheets, display devices and laminates
US11512232B2 (en) Pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet
JP7339087B2 (en) Adhesive sheet
WO2023027092A1 (en) Laminate
WO2023027091A1 (en) Multilayer body
JP7321343B1 (en) double-sided adhesive sheet
JP7321344B1 (en) Adhesive sheet
WO2022249726A1 (en) Adhesive sheet, display device, and laminate
WO2022054787A1 (en) Pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet
JP6884258B1 (en) Adhesive sheet
WO2024057558A1 (en) Double-sided sticky sheet with release liners
WO2022249727A1 (en) Adhesive sheet, display device, and laminate
WO2023074448A1 (en) Adhesive sheet
JP7258102B1 (en) Adhesive sheet, adhesive sheet with release liner and laminate
JP7087162B2 (en) Adhesive sheet
WO2022054789A1 (en) Adhesive sheet
WO2022264860A1 (en) Adhesive sheet, display device, laminate, and adhesive composition
WO2022264861A1 (en) Adhesive sheet, display device, and laminate

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22861380

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 202280056859.7

Country of ref document: CN

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20247009966

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 22861380

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1